Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
AN 08·10-195
BRITISH: FOR OFFICIAL USE ONt Y
Handbook of
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
VOLUME 2
VHF COMPONENTS
Not to be published. The information given in this document is not to be, communicated,
either directly or indirectly, to the press or to any person not holding an official position in
His Majesty's Service.
15 APRIL, 1944
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
------------*------------
Published under joint au-
thority of the United States
War and Navy Depart-
ments and the Air Council
of the United Kingdom
------------~ --------------
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 011-10-195
UNSATISfACTORY REPORTS
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
NOTICE
iv RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-lO-195
TABLE Of CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
SECTION I-GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Introduction. 1
2. VHF Receiver. ...................................................................... . 4
3. VHF Transmitter. 5
4. VHF Control Units. 6
5. Testing Equipment for VHF. , , .. 12
6. VHF Tube Complement... . ...... . 12
SECTION V-MAINTENANCE
~
1. Test Equipment ...... . 53
2. Pre·flight Check .............................. . 63
3. Periodic Inspection .. ......................... . 65
4. Lubrication . ..... . 66
5. Replacement of Selector 0·101 in VHF Receiver ..... 68
6. Replacement of Tuning Inductors in VHF Transmitter .............. ..................... . 71
7. Replacement of VHF Transmitter Turrets ............ ........ , .......................... . 71
RESTRICTED v
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
SECTION VIII-DRAWINGS
vi RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 011-10-195
!.1ST Of ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Page
1. VHF Components of Model AN/ARC-S Aircraft Radio Equipment ........................ . xii
2. VHF and LF-MF-HF Transmitters and Receivers ........................................ . 2
3. VHF Receiver ....................................................................... . 4
4. Block Diagram of VHF Receiver ....................................................... . S
5. VHF Transmitter .................................................................... . 6
6. Control Unit C-30/ ARC-S ............................................................. . 7
7. Control Unit C-30/ARC-S-Schematic Circuit ........................................... . 8
8. Control Unit C-42/ ARC-S ............................................................. . 9
9. Control Unit C-42/ ARC-S-Schematic Circuit. .......................................... . 9
10. Control Unit C-43/ ARCS ............................................................ . 10
11. Control Unit C-43/ARC-5-Schematic Circuit ........................................... . 11
12. Transmitter Rack Selector Plate Wired for VHF Transmitter .............................. . 13
13. VHF Receiver Tuning Controls .......... ........................... , , ........ , ..... , .. ~ 16
14. Selector 0-101 (or O-lOIA) ............................................................ . 26
15. Selector O-lOl-Schematic Circuit. .................................................... . 28
16. Selector O-lOlA-Schematic Circuit .................................................... . 30
17. Selector 0-102 ....................................................................... . 31
18. Selector 0-102-Schematic Circuit. ..................................................... . 32
19. VHF Receiver--Right Side (Showing Selector 0-101) ..................................... . 33
20. VHF Receiver-Right Side (Showing Selector 0-102) ..................................... . 34
21. VHF Receiver-Left Side (Showing Selector 0-101) ...................................... . 33
22. VHF Receiver-Left Side (Showing Selector 0-(02) ...................................... . 36
23. VHF Receiver-Top .................................................................. . 37
24. R-F Amplifier Input-Equivalent Circuit. ............................................... . 38
25. R-F Amplifier Output-Equivalent Circuit .............................................. . 39
26. Detector-Partial Schematic Circuit .................................................... . 40
27. AVC and MVC-Partial Schematic Circuit. ............................................. . 40
28. AVC Rectifier-Partial Schematic Circuit. .............................................. . 41
29. Squelch Rectifier-Partial Schematic Circuit. ............................ , ............... . 42
30. Squelch Amplifier-Partial Schematic Circuit. ........................................... . 42
31. Squelch Amplifier-Equivalent Circuit. ................................................. . 43
32. VHF Transmitter-Left ............................................................... . 4S
33. VHF Transmitter-Top ............................................................... . 46
34. VHF Transmitter-Bottom ............................................................ . 47
35. Sockets X-303 and X-304 ............................................................. . 48
~.
36. Test Equipment IE-35-A .............................................................. . S2
37. Antenna A-85-A ..................................................................... . 53
38. Indicator I-106-A ................................ '.' .................................. .. S4
39. Indicator 1-106-A-Schematic Circuit. .................................................. . SS
40. Test Unit 1-155-A .................................................................... ,. S6
41. Test Unit l-155-A-Schematic Circuit .................................................. . 57
RESTRICTED vii
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
viii RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
FIRE: If the radio compartment has been exposed to gasoline vapor, make cer-
tain that it is aired out well before turning on the power.
The dynamotor on the receiver generates 250 volts d-c. The danger of exposure
to this voltage must not be ignored. l\iJake certain that all dynamotors are off
before performing any adjustment to the equipment other than those accessible
at the front of the receiver.
THE ATTENTION OF OFFICERS AND OPERATING PERSONNEL IS
DIRECTED TO U. S. NAVY BUREAU OF ENGINEERING CIRCULAR
LETTER NO. Sa OF 3 OCTOBER, 1934, OR SUBSEQUENT REVISIONS
THEREOF ON THE SUBJECT OF" RADIO-SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO
BE OBSERVED."
RESTRICTED ;x
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
MEANS:-
1. Explosives, when provided.
2. Hammers, axes, sledges, or whatever heavy objects are readily available.
3. Burning by means of incendiaries, such as gasoline, oil, paper or wood.
4. Grenades and shots from available arms.
5. \\lhere possi.bIe, and time permits, bury all debris or dispose of it in streams
or other bodies of water.
PROCEDURE:-
1. Obliterate all identifying marks. Destroy nameplates and circuit labels.
2. Demolish all panels, castings, switch- and instrument-boards.
3. Destroy all controls, switches, relays, connecting means, and meters.
4. Rip out all wiring in electrical equipment. Smash gas, oil and cooling sys-
tems in gas engine generators, etc.
5. Smash every electrical or mechanical part whether rotating, moving or fixed.
6. Break up all operating instruments such as keys, headsets, microphones, etc.
7. Destroy all classes of carrying cases, straps, containers, etc.
x RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
GUARANTEE
This equipment, including all parts and spare parts, except vacuum tubes, and
material normally consumed in operation, is guaranteed for a period of ONE
YEAR from the- date of delivery of the equipment to and acceptance by the
Government with the understanding that all such items found to be defective as
to material, workmanship or manufacture will be repaired or replaced, LOob. any
point within the continental limits of the United States designated by the Gov-
ernment, without delay and at no expense to the Government; provided that
such guarantee' will not obligate the contractor to make repair or replacement
of any such defective items unless the defect appears within the aforementioned
period and the contractor is notified therebf in writing within a reasonable time
and the defect is not the result of normal expected shelf life det~rioration.
To the extent the equipment, including all parts and spare parts, as defined
above, is of the contractor's design or is of a design selected by the contractor, it is
also guaranteed, subject to the foregoing conditions, against defects in design.
All such defective trems will be subject to ultimate return to the contractor.
In view of the fact that normal activities of the Naval Service may result in the
use of equipment in such. remote portions of the world or under such conditions
as to preclude the return of the defective items for repair or replacement without
jeopardizing the integrity of Naval communications, t~e exigencies of the Service,
therefore, may necessitate expeditious repair of such items in order to prevent
extended interruption of communications. In such cases the return of the defec~
tive items for examination by the contractor prior to repair or replacement will
not be mandatory. The report of a responsible authority, including details of the
conditions surrounding the failure, will be acceptable as a basis for affecting ex-
peditious adjustment under the provisions of this contractual guarantee.
The above one year period will not include any portion of time the equipment
fails to perform satisfactorily due to any such defects, and any items repaired or
replaced by the contractor will be guaranteed anew under this provision .
..
RESTRICTED xi
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
RADIO TRANSMITTER
T-23/ ARC-5
RADIO RECEIVER
R-28/ARC-!J .
PLUG
49195
"
••
J
i~j~~ It,.~\1
COAXIAL CABLE ADAPTER DC-3D DC-31
RG-8/U 49192 CRXSTAL UNITS
CONTROL UNITS
xii RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seclion i
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 1
l. iNTRODUCTION
b. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED
The following are furnished as VHF components of Model AN/ARC-S Aircraft Radio Equipment:
Numerical
Series of
Over-all Weight Reference
Name of Unit Dimensions (Pounds) Symbols
Radio Transmitter T-23/ARC-5, with Tubes and Crystals IS%;" x S?{6" x 52~'(4' 12.3 300 to 399
Radio Receiver R-28/ARC-S, with Tubes aud Crystals,
less Dynamotor 1411 X 7%'2" X 4YsII 14.5 100 to 299
Crystal Unit DC-30 for VHF Transmitter lYs" X h6"
1l:t(s" X 0.06
Crystal Unit DC-31 for VHF Receiver 1%" X 1Ys II x 516" 0.06
Control Unit C-30/ ARC-S 3%" x 4 yz x 4Ys" ll 1.4 400 to 409
Control Unit C-42/ ARC-S 51%2" X 374" x 3 1.0 460 to 469
Control Uuit C-43/ ARC-S 2:%,/I X 9Yz" x Sk? 2.6 410 to 419
Test Equipment IE-35-A 620 to 659
Test Equipment AN/GRM-l 600 to 699
Cable, Coaxial, RG-8/U (previously coded CASSF-SO-l) 0.1 per foot
Adapter, Coaxial, Right Angle, Type 49192 lh(;" X 1!Yt6 11 X %" 0.07
Plug, Coaxial, Type 49195 1?-i6" X UII 0.06
RESTRICTED
ReS1RIC1EO
p.N 08_,0-195
Section I
1',,'''9,ap'' ,
,,------
rs
Figure 2_ alid IF_MF-HF Transmitters dod Rece;ye
VHF
RESTRICTED Seclion I
AN OIl·IO·J95 P"ragraph I
Over-all dimensions and weights are shown in VHF transmi tter by means of a coaxial transmission
Figures 55, 56 and 57. Photographs of the com- line which is made of Cable RG-8/U (CASSF-50-j).
ponents, except the test equipments, are shown in A similar line is used to carry the antenna circuit from
Figure 1 (the test equipments are covered in Section the transmitter to the VHF ,receiver. The antenna
V of this volume). A VHF transmitter and a VHF switching relay for the VHF components is contained
receiver, mounted in racks with typical LF-MF-HF within the transmitter.
components, are shown in Figure 2.
Two types of quarterwwave base-fed antennas are
used with the VHF equipment. Rod-type Antenna
c. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT
AT-8/ AR has a base that is similar to the ZB and
SUPPLIED.
ABK antennas except that the socket is of larger I
The VHF components described in this volume diameter. Mast-type Antennas AN-104A (Army)
constitute only a part of Model AN/ARC-5 Aircraft and AN-l04AX (Navy) are for dual-purpose use,
Radio Equipment. In order to fo~m a working radio primarily as a VHF antenna, and secondarily as a
system, it is necessary to provide certain basic com- support for a fore-and-aft type antenna,
ponents which are common to all frequencies (LF,
MF, HF and VHF). These .common coniponents, g. PRIMARY POWER
including a modulator unit, racks, mountings, etc" are Primary power is obtained from the aircraft 24-to-28
described in Volume 1. volt, doc power supply. The current drain at 28 volts,
An antenna AT-8/AR, AN-I04A, AN-104AX, or for the VHF equipment, under various operating
the equi'valent is also required. conditions, is as follows:
Operating Condition Current Drain
d. OPERATING CHANNELS VHF Receiver only 2,0 amperes
The VHF' equipment, both transmittiIlg and re- VHF Transmitter and Modulator
ceiving, is designed to operate on four pre-set frequency Standby 2,7 amperes
channels which are, for convenience, d('signated U At!, Transmitting 9.5 ampere.';
n
U B , H C", and /I IY'. All frequencies in the trans~
mitter and receiver are controHed by quartz crystals VHF Receiver, Transmitter and Modulator
Standby 4,7 amperes
which have relatively low frequency drift within the Transmitting 11.5 amperes
temperature range which is encountered in service. Channel Switching 6.9 amperes
The transmiUpr can be set to operate on any desired
frequencies within thp following limits: h. OPERATING CONDITIONS
Channel Frequency The VHF components of Model AN/ARCS Air-
A 100 to 124 me. craft Radio Equipment are, in general, designed to
B 122 to 146 me. perform sat.isfactorily at ambient temperatures from
C 122 to 146 me -S8F (-50C) to +122F (+50C); at any relative
D 132 to 156 me. humidity up to 90 per cent; and at any atmospheric
pressure from sea level to 35,000 feet. An exception
The receiver can be set to operate on any desired to these limits should be noted in the case of early
four channels between 100 and 156 megacycles. mbdel VHF receivers. Receivers with selector 0-101
have a low-temperature rating of -410 (-20C).
e. REMOTE CONTROL Receivers with selector O-lOlA have a low-temperature
Bot.h transmitting and receiving VHF equipment is rating of - 22F ( 30C).
designed for remote control only. Channel selection,
the choice of automatic or manual volume control, the i. NOTE ON FREQUENCY DESIGNATIONS
control of signal volume in the headset cirouit, and Throughout this handbook the terms low-frequency
the connection to either of two headset circuits, are (LF), medium-frequency (MF), etc., will be used in
all accomplished by the use of control units which,are conformity with the following standard designations
within convenient reach of the pilot. So, also, is the of frequencies:
selection of tone, CW or voice transmission. Very Low Frequency (VLF) 10 to 30 kilocycle.';
Low Frequency (LF) 30 to 300 kilocycles
f. ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS Medium Frequency (MF) 300 to 3,000 kilocycles
High Frequency (HF) 3 to 30 megacycles
The antenna and antenna relay used with the Very High Frequency (VHF) 30 to 300 megacycles
LF-MF-HF components cannot be used in the VHF Ultra High Frequency (UHF) 300 to 3,000 megacycles
range. A separate VHF antenna is connected to the Super High Frequency (SHF) 3,000 to 30,000 megacycles
RESTRICTED
Section I RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
ACCESSrO~O~O~~R'O:~~__-T~
TUNING
4 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Sed;on f
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 2-3
V'I02
~KEII --= -H-;;:j
OET
1 fiRST
kfAMP.
L..-...........~~
,I ,
'-~
, ,,
, ,
v-loa 11-105
·····-+--1
I v~05 ,
I
: TO ~AOIO RECEIVER
"1
L~~~~ E~MENTS
O'lYSTI\L O-llVC SQUELCH
OSC RtCT REeT
times called first detector) (V-102). Two j-f amplifier use in telephonic transmission, but may be used, in an
stages (V-l03 and V-l04) are followed by a dual emergency, to transmit either CW or tone~modulated
triode tube (V-lOS), which functions as a detector, an MCW telegraph signals. All modulation, both tele-
A VC rectifier and a squelch rectifier. The succeeding phone and telegraph, is 011 the basis of amplitude
tube (V-106) serves as a squelch amplifier and as a modulation.
first stage of audio-frequency amplification. A second The audio-frequency power for modulating the
stage of audio frequency amplification (V-107) fur- transmitter is furnished by Modulator Unit M D-7 /
nishes sufficient power output to operate several ARCS. The high-voltage d-c power is also furnished
headsets. by this unit. The modulator is described in Volume 1.
The radio-frequency oscillator (V-108) is of the Anyone of four pre-set crystal~controlled channels
crystal-controlled type. It is followed by two harmonic can be selected by means of a motor-driven selector
generator stages (frequency multipliers) (V-l09) and mechanism', which is under control of push buttons in
(V-llO). The final frequency, as supplied to the the radio control unit. A coaxial type antenna switch-
mixer, is 24 times the crystal frequency. ing relay is built into the transmitter. This serves to
RESTRICTED :;
Section I RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 3-4 AN 08-10~ 1'~5
TUNING CONTROLS
[ ,~~:'
FW)fllNG
CHANNEL __~____-1~1
INDICATOR
TEST
transfer the antenna circuit from the receiver to the channel selectinR motor (B-301). When actuated by
transmitter when a signal is to be transmitted. the depression of one of the push buttons of the radio
control unit, this motor rotates all turrets to such a
b. BRIEF CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION position that the proper tuned circuits are connected.
A schematic circuit diagram of the transmitter is At the same time, mechanism is provided to operate
shown in Figure 65. A crystal-controlled harmonic one set of springs of switch 5-301, thereby connecting
oscillator (V-301) excites the first harmonic generator the appropriate crystal into the circuit.
stage (V-302) at double the crystal frequency. In turn, A complete description of the VHF transmitter is
this later stage triples the frequency, and excites the given in Section IV of this volume.
second harmonic generator (V-303) at six times the
crystal frequency. The second harmonic generator, 4_ VHF CONTROL UNITS
which again triples the frequency, drives the output
stage (V-304) at eighteen times the crystal frequency. a. GENERAL
The output tube is plate and screen modulated by Three control units are supplied for use with the
audio-frequency power obtained from the modulator VHF components of Model AN/ ARC-S Aircraft Radio
unit. Equipment. These are as follows:
Four complete sets of r-f tuned circuits are provided. Control Unit C-30/ ARC-5-providing facilities for
one set being tuned to each of the four pre-set fre- the remote control of one VHF transmitter and two
quencies. They are mounted in rotatable turrets MF-HF transmitters. It also furnishes the means for
(Z-301, Z-302 and Z-303), which are driven by the controlling the channel selection of one VHF receiver.
6 RESTRICTED
Sadlon i
1',,'09'01'\1 4
RESiltl C1EP
AN 08_10-195
Control Unit C-42 / ARC-S-providing the controls way communication on one of the VHF channels
for one VHF receiver, except for channel selection. (A, B, C or D, depending upon which button was
Channel selection must be made by some other means , depressed).
such as U ni t C-30 men tioned above. The depression of push button 2 or J energizes the
Control Unit C-43/ARC-5-arranged to control heater circuits of all transmitting equipment. It also
one VHF receiver. except for channel selection, in selects one of the two MF-HF transmitters. The
exactly the same manner as Unit C-42 just listed. In equipment is thus prepared for transmission on one
addition, it provides complete controls for two of the channels to which the MF-HF transmitters
LF-MF-HF receivers. have previously been tuned.
Each of these control units is described briefly in The operation of button 2 or J does not affect the
the following paragraphs. A more complete descrip- condition of the Vl1.F receiver; it remains on the
tion is contained in Section. IV of this volume. channel last selected by push button A, B, C or D.
The depression of the OFF push button de-'energizes
b. CONTROL UNIT C-30ARC-S the heater circuits of all transmitters, but does 'not
The general arrangement of Control Pnit C-30 change the condition of the VHF receiver; it remains
ARC-S is shown in Figure 6. A schematic circuit on the channel last selected (A, B, C or 0). It will be
diagram is shown in Figure 7. noted that, in these cases. although the VHF receiver
The depression of anyone of the four push button~, remains tuned to one of the four channels, the pilot or
A, B, C, D, energizes the heater circuits of all trans- operator has no visible indication of which channel.
mitting equipment (including the, :\"fF-HF transmit- The TONE-CW-VOICE switch is used to control the
ters, if these are supplied)'. I t also operates the channel- type or emission of the transmitter. Ordinarily, it is
selecting mechanism in the VHF transmitter and the left in the VOICE position when the VHF transmitter
VIIF rzceiver. The equipment is then ready for two- is used.
NOTE:
THE NUMBERS ON THE CONTACTS OF SWITCH
S-401 REFER TO THE POSITION OF THE SWI1Q-l
LEVER AT WHICH THESE CONTACTS ARE CLOSfO.
TONE IS CONSIOERED AS POSITION I, CW AS
PaS. 2 , AND VOICE AS POS. 3 ,
i---;;;--!
1----- --_. ---_.- . i (2) !
I ii HlN£ '" 1 '" """ I!
i S-4DI
3 1,2
i
! ~"l!
I_~i ·II
I 2
L .JI,-
Ic"oo (. -))
1.. ,,_8 5 4 15 18 6 3 2 I 17 10 9 12 14 7 13 16 II
I
J -401 J- 402
(OUTSiOE VIEW) (OUTSIDE VIEW)
II RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section I
AN 08-10-195 Pa,ag,aph 4
\
R-460A
R,-460C R-463
R-4$4
R-462
R-460A
"'iii+-- R"460 B
R-460C
J-46]
--~"--.---
SPECIAL OPERA liNG NOTE
AlON}J ';,'
8 Mv;if~;F:~;:
~( ';',' I
-
Wait 6 seconds after pressing push button
A, B, C or D before pressing 2, J or OFF.
I "',) , . '.' '" '5·4&1 I If t.his is not done, the channel switching
\34"5'/ 'fV\e~
~
,.___ ___ ~....J
"1 ,- . ---'>
motor in the VHF receiver may continue to
run. It can oe stopped by pressing' the A,
S-4Q.
SEE. NOP;; I B, C or D push button. The motor may
R·J{,()A
() . burn out if this instruction is not followed.
)
R-1~~)
"
R-'.OC ~\
~ --i----.1....-- ~
This information should be passed on to all
L_ ___ ._e:. \ \
pilots and operators.
~~~,~ ~~~~~ i
~~1~
l\:'rtl::... "t
'* --
ri- "'ti'~ c. CONTROL UNIT C-42/ARC-5
Photographs of Control Unit C-42/ ARC-5 are
·4'00 1 shO\vn in Figure 8. A schematic circuit diagram is
shown in Figure 9. Except for channel selection, this
rr=~
I 1-, ·-i ---
I unit cont.rols one VHF receiver; the channd selection
1
is made by Control Unit C-30, as explained ill the
=
, -~-.,--Yta-ltJ]J L1 -'"
)
+
preceding paragraph.
The MVC-OFF-AVC switch turns the VI-lF receiver 011
~b,,8~1r3
J-400 A·reL e·rEL ,j-4C;d
20 0 05 J-4~1 ./-4(,2 and off and also sets it for operation on the basis of
30 either automatic volume control or manual volume
r OUTSIDE VIEW) control. Regardless of whether automatic or manual
control is used, the level of noise and signal in the
headsets c,an be regulated by operation of the INCREASE
OUTPUT knob.
RESTRICTED
Section I RESTRICTED
Paragraph 4 AN 08-10-195
10 RESTRICTED
(Q
:!1
c
"m
A
'~
" '" ,
,-'
5-410
B
F0:)w
_s~
" '
A~ •
5-412
r!:!J ·\l;:~,~ ·
,;.
.•.
5-413
~.
~t4
Mve f!S?~fA Ave
5-4151{.J
jJ~
NOTES
'-- ~ S-~6~ S-416 IS "ON" WHEN- 5-4!5 IS ON'\\vC"
T
n
SU NtJTC I OR "AVC" 5-416 IS "OFF" WHEN 9-415
IS "OFF"
0
~
2. CONNECTIONS AS SHOWN ARE FOR u:m
I NOTE 2 I IMPEDANCE HEADSETS _ FOR HIGH iM-
:;-
2-
c:
g,.
R-Ff
soooow
~ff
50000 .....
R~412A
5000010.1
~ -- -- >---_\--+---
R-412B ~
6(XXXhU?,
r-';> \
4600w
R-412C
r -~
-L
"
PEDANCE HEADSETS TRANSFER LEADS
FROM TERMINALS I AND 2 Of R-412 C
"TO THE TERMINALS! AN!)Z OF R"4IZ B.
»
z
...'"
,-
'"....
m
~~b Rt~2 o
m
V>
...w
'".... "
V>
?R-416
,
-
00
n
•
It
N'
(C 1H14
(- ~ 180'"
o, '"1:\
m
1:1
:..
'"
n r-
2200-
-'" m
1:1
<>4'0
'M' '"
l'3-"
m
3Q
~.
0
166 H
h II j I I
0
~. 123456786 66
J-410
1 t:::::J bL,2~~'67.J
bog U~~~567iJ =
(
r
J-417
A TEL 8 TEL J-411
20 0805 HI' A TEL a TEL
J-413 .}-414 J-415 J-416
,3004
J~410,J·41I.J·412
VIEWED FROM OUTSIDE
"0
Q
il II>
III
• il "n
.
,,",
":r o
~
Section I RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 4-6 AN 08-10-195
circuits. Access to these circuits is afforded by the channel selection, for two LF-M'F-HF receivers. The
A TEL~B TEL jacks at the bottom of the control unit. functions and operation are the same as those of
The jacks accommodate the plugs in which the head- Control Unit C-26/ ARC-S, which is described in
set cords terminate. Volume I of this handbook.
Ann)' JAN
Quantity TYi)e Type Use
Transmitter
2 VT-136 JAN-1625 Oscillator (V-301). 1st Harmonic Generator (V-302).
2 VT-286 JAN-832A 2nd Harmonic Generator (V-303). Power Amplifier (V-304).
Receiver
4 VT-269 ]AN-717A R-F Amplifier (V-lOl). Mixer (V-I02). 1st Harmonic Gen-
erator (V-l09). 2nd Harmonic Generator (V-lIO).
3 \IT-288 JAN-125m 1st I-F Amplifier (V-l03). 2nd I-F Amplifier (V-104).
Oscillator (V-lOS).
2 VT-289 JAN-12SL7GT Detector, AVC Rectifier and Squelch Rectifier (V-lOS).
1st A-F Amplifier and Squelch Amplifier (V-l06).
\/T-134 .lAN-12A6 or 2nd A-F Amplifier (V-l07) .
JAN-12A6GT
12 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
ADAPTATION OF TEXT
FOR IJSE WITH
RADIO TRANSMITTER T-126/ARC-S
Throughout the following text the VHF transmitter referred to is RADIO TRANSMITTER
'1'-23/ ARC-5. The descriptive material and the instructions for use of this transmitter apply
equally to RADIO TRANSMITTER T-126/ARC-5 in all respects except the two features
outlined below.
I. FREQUENCY RANGE
2. COMPONENT PARTS
The tuning coil assemblies in turrets Z-301, Z-302, and Z-303 of Radio Transmitter
T -126/ ARC-5 differ from those described in this text but all other component parts are identical.
The following tuning coil assemblies are used in Radio Transmitter T-126/ARC-5. (Refer to
Table of Replaceable Parts, page 96.)
2. INSTALLATION
(t. GENERAL
Installation of the VHF components should follow
the same general procedure as that recommended for
the LF-MF-HF components in Volume 1 of this
handbook. Installation dimensions and weights for
the VHF components are indicated in Figures 55, 56
and 57 of this volume.
Cabling diagrams for each type of aircraft will be Figure 12-Transmitfer Rack Selector Plate
funlished by the Bureau of Aeronautics. If for any Wired for VHF Transmitter
RESTRICTED 13
Section II RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
e. COAXIAL CABLES Beware of the high voltage that is exposed at the termi-
All antenna wiring for the VHF equipment should nals of the receptacle when this cajJ is removed.
be made with coaxial cable RG-8/11 (formerly coded
CASSF-50-1). The plug and right-angle adapter used i. PUSH BUTTONS OF C-30/ARC-5
with this cable are shown on the photograph in
If a Control Unit C-30iARC-S is installed in an air-
Figure 1. All coaxial cabling should be made as
craft with only one or two radio transmitters, it is
short as possible, consistent with proper slack for
recommended t_hat the unused push buttons be
motion of equipment in the shock mountings, and for
blocked in order to prevent their accidental opera-
removal of plugs and fittings. The coaxial cable from
tion by the pilot or operator. Likewise, if it is known
the VI-1F antenna should be connected to the right~
that one or more of the VHF channel selection push
hand receptacle of Radio Transmitter '1'-23/ ARC-S.
buttons are not to be used, they should also be blocked.
The coaxial cable from Radio Receiver R-28iARC-S
This can be aecomplished by drilling a small hole in
should be connected to the left~hand receptacle on tht:
the shank close to the surface of the control unit and
transmitter. In the normal non-energized position of
then inserting a cotter pin through the shank.
the antenna relay \vithill the radio transmitter, the
antenna circuit passes through the coaxial relay to It will be found. that, in some cases, the push button
the receiver. These functions may be readily under- knobs are secured to their shanks by means of smaH
stood by reference to Figure 60. internal springs. In order to prevent trouble due to
rusting and failure of these springs in service, it is
J. VHF TRANSMITTER CRYSTALS advisable to cement the knobs in place. This can be
Each Radio Transmitter T-23/ARC-5 reqUIres done by the use of Glyptal cement.
from one to four Crystal Cllits D(,-30 (one for each
channel which is to be used). The frequency of the j. VHF ANTENNA
crystal is one-eighteenth of the carrier frequency: There are certain precautions which should be
Carrier Frequency observed in connection with the installation of the
Crystal Frequency
18 VHF antenna. The mounting base dimensions for
Antenna AT-SiAR are identical with those of An-
Carrier Frequency = 18 x Crystal Frequency
tennas ZB and ABK; they may be installed in a
The location of the crystal corresponding to each similar manner. The mast-type antenna requires
chan!1('\ s(,jpctor push hutton (A, H, C and D) is en- particular attention to insure' proper grounding. It is
gr<l ved on t he proper socket, recommended that a grounding strip be connected to
the skin of t.he airplane at the point where the mast
K. VHF RH ·UVl·:R ('RYSTALS
passes through the skin, making sure that clean metal-
Each Radio Receiver R~28/ARC-.s reqmres from lic surfaces are in electrical contact. The over-all
one to four ('rysta! Units 1)( '-31 (one for each channel length of the strip should not exceed 2Y:J inches (make
which is to be used). The frequency of the cry'stal is it shorter if possible); it should be not less than V2
one-t\vcnty'-fourth of the difference between the car~ inch wide; and it should be made of the same material
riel' frequency and the intermediate frequency (6,9 as the skin of the airplane. A minimum clearance of
megacyclt~s) : Vt6 inch should be maintained between the skin of the
Carrier Frequency-6.9 mc airplane and the metallic portion of a mast-type
Crystal Frequency
24 antenna. In attaching a fore-and-aft antenna to the
Carrier Frequency = (24 x Crystal Frequency) + top of a VHF mast, the wire to the insulator should
6.9 mc be as short as possible; the distance from the hole in
14 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seelion II
the mast to the hole in the strain insulator should not b. TUNING PROCEDURE FOR
exceed two indw:;, Paint, caulking materials and VHF RECEIVER
compounds, and oils must be kept from the insulating
(I) General.
surfaces of both types of antenna in order not to
impair their E'tliciency. The following procedure assumes that the VHF
receiver is in good operating condition and has been
In general, the VF-IF antenna should he located
properly aligned. All that is required is to tune it to
somewhere along tIl(> cClltf:'r line of the airplalw. For
four channels.
other than carr;('r-has~'d airplallf>s, it rc-c()11lm(,lld{~d
that locations be tried on thF \)Olt(HU of the fuselage. (2) A pparatus Required.
It should be 110tNl that if <l location is se!('cted too far
One Cry::;tal Unit DC-31 for each frequency to which
forward or in t he vicini l~: of t he propellers, a phellome-
the receiver i:-> 10 be tuned.
non known as propclln modulation may dis{Ol"t til('
signal. Another point to bv kept in mind at these Screwdri ver.
frequencies is the shadowing effeet produCE,d by wings, Tuning \-\Tench for VHF receiver (one of these
fuselage and tail surfal'''';;. wrenches is secured to the rear of the small door on
the front of each VHF receiver).
A final and positive check on antcnna location can
be made by a Hight te~t with the airplanc ilnd ground Buzzer-type'r-f noise generator as supplied with
station at least 30 mi\es apart for a check of tht, hori- Test Equipment 1E-35-A. (Not always required.)
zontal pat tern. The airplane should be flown at vari-
(3) Preparation.
ous attitudes and constant distance in order to d(,ter-
mine the shadow eff~~ct of wings, fuselage and tail Disconnect the coaxial cable from the antenna jack
surfaces. An additional check should be made at of the VHF receiver. Remove the receiver from its
various altitudes directly above the ground station in rack. Remove the right hand cover and insert crystals
order to observe the signal strength. of the desired frequencies. Replace the cover and re-
store the receiver to the rack. Turn the MVC-OFF-AVC
k. COAXIAL TRANS\IISSION LINE switch to the MVC position. Turn the volume control
The connection between the VHF antenna and the to give maximum sensitivity. Allow 30 seconds for
VHF transmitter and receiver is usually made with a the tubes to heat up.
flexible coaxial transmission line such as RG-8/U (4) Tuning.
iCASSF-50-!) or it, equivalent. When space is avail-
Operate the channel selector to A by depressing
able to obtain the necessary bending radii at the ends
push-button A. Open the door on the front of the
of the transmissioJl line, the line should be terminated
receiver and remove small tuning wrench clipped to
in Navy Type Plugs 49195 (see Figure 57). If space
the inside of the door. (Additional wrenches of this
is not available, and it is necessary to make sharp
same type are furnished with Test Equipments
turns, Navy Type Adapter 49192 or its equivalent
AN/GRM-I and IE-35-A.) Insert the long end of the
should be used (see Figure 57).
wrench into the hole adjacent to' the letter A. (See
Figure 13.) With the end of the wrench on the bottom
3. ADJUSTMENT of the hole, a slight movement in a counter-clockwise
direction should cause it to engage in the hollow head
a. PRECAUTIONS of the socket head cap screw which holds the selector
Precaution"s preparatory to turning on the power of cam to the tuning shaft. Continue turning in a
this equipment appear in the Safety Notice in the counter-clockwise direction one full turn.
front of this volume. Do not ranO'De the wrench from the locking screw u.ntil
Before makin?, the followinf.. adjustments read' carefully the cam has been adjusted and locked.
the j)aragra,phs below and SECTION 1II (OPERA-
Turn the manual tuning dial at the top of the
TION) so that the functions of the controls are welt
receiver to the approximate frequency of Channel A.
understood.
Then, while listening to the background noise in the
Before Radio Receiver R-28/ARC-5 and Radio headset, rock the manual tuning dial until a maximum
Transmitter T-23-'ARC-S are tuned in an airplane, of background noise is heard. If necessary, reduce
the VHF antenna and the coaxial transmission line the gain by turning the volume control. Lock the A
should be in.place. The proper connections for each selector cam by turning the locking screw in a clock-
type of aircraft are shown in the cabling diagram ,wise direction. Remove the wrench. Repeat this pro-
furnished by the Bureau of Aeronautics. cedure for channels B, C, and D.
RESTRICTED 15
Section II RESTRICTED
Paragraph 3 AN 08-10-195
FREQUENCY J-IOI
I,-
t:'II'''''lJ.-JI~
SQUELCH
ADJUSTMENT --~
TUNING 0 _ __
CONTROLS
!~'
16 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Sedion II
AN 08-10-195 Pa,agraph 3
Re-check the operation of the tuning control lower meter readings may be expected; if the
mechanism on all four channels. battery is higher, higher meter readings may
Under some circumstances it may be found that the be obtained.
level of background noise in the headset is not suf- (2) Apparatus Required.
ficiently high to provide a convenient tuning guide.
If this is the case, use th~ buzzer-type r-f noise gene- One Crystal Unit DC-30 for each frequency to
rator. Place it near the antenna receptacle of the which the transmitter is to be tuned.
receiver. If increased pick-up is required, insert a Test Unit I-ISS-A (Part of Test Equipment
piece of wire several inches long into the receptacle. IE-3S-A)
After the receiver has been tuned replace the antenna Transmitter Tuning Wrench (Part of Test Equip-
connection. ment IE-3S-A)
NOTE
Antenna A-8S-A (Part of Test Equipment IE-35-A)
If the selector cam locking screws are not
sufficiently tightened, the drag of the pawl Indicator I-I06-A (Part of Test Equipment
may cause the cam to slip on the shaft. In IE-3S-A)
this event, the depression of a channel select- Screwdriver
ing push button (A, il, C, or D) causes the
tuning motor to run continuously. To cor- (3) Preparation.
rect this condition: turn the receiver OFF, Remove the radio transmitter from the rack. Re-
turn the manual tuning dial until the loose move the bottom cover plate and insert Crystal Units
locking screw is in line with the hole, depress DC-30 in their proper sockets. Be sure that the fre-
the push button for the channel under con- quencies of the crystal units correspond to the channel
sideration, turn the receiver ON to re-energize carrier frequencies as shown on the label on the inside
the selector relay, insert the wrench, retune of the cover plate. Replace the bottom cover plate
the channel as described, and then tighten and re-install the transmitter in the rack. If the trans-
the locking screw. mitter rack has space for more than one transmitter,
This trouble condition should not be confused be sure that the VHF transmitter is installed in the
with another cause of motor "run away" stall which is wired for position #1 (see Section II,
which sometimes results from improper Paragraph 2d of this volume).
manipulation of the channel selection push Re-attach the lower right-hand receptacle which
buttons. This latter condition arises as fol- connects to the control unit. Remove the cap marked
lows: push button A, 13, C, or D is depressed, CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE from the lower left-hand re-
and then, before channel selection is com- ceptacle and attach the cord of Test Unit I-ISS-A.
pleted in the receiver, push button 2, 3, or Connect Antenna A-85-A in place of the coaxial trans-
OFF is depressed. The motor continues to run mission line to the aircraft antenna. Set the TONE-
until it burns out or until one of the buttons, CW-VOICE switch on the radio control unit to VOICE ..
A, B, C, orD is re-operated. Operate the push button for Channel A on the radio
control unit and observe that A appears on the
c. TUNING PROCEDURE FOR CHANNEL INDICATOR in the front panel of the trans-
VHF TRANSMITTER mitter. Repeat for channels B, C, and 0 to check
(I) General. mechanical operation of the selector. Allow the trans-
mitter to warm up for 30 seconds before proceeding
The procedure given below covers a complete re-
further. Then operate the push button on the micro-
tuning" of a VHF transmitter installed in an airplane.
phone or the test switch on the transmitter rack only
If the transmitter has already been tunedon the bench
as long as required to make each measurement or
to the four frequencies required, steps (3) to (11),
adjustment.
inclusive, can be omitted. In this case, it is necessary
merely to adjust the output circuit and antenna (4) Heater and Plate Voltages.
coupling to the particular transmission line and air- Turn the meter switch on Test Unit I-15S-A to
craft an tenna. position 6. The meter should read approximately 54
NOTE scale divisions, indicating 27 volts on the tube heaters
The tuning procedure given below includes (corresponding to 28 volts at the battery). Turn the
certain meter readings on Test Unit I-ISS-A. switch to position 7. The meter deflection should be
These are based upon a battery voltage of between 53 and 55 scale divisions, indicating a plate
28 volts. If the battery is lower than this, voltage of S30 to 550 volts.
RESTRICTED 17
Seclion II RESTRICTED
Paragraph 3 AN 08-10-195
(5) Crystal Check .(10) R-F Amplifier Out/JUt Circuit and Antenna
Coupling.
Turn the meter s\vitch on Test Unit I~155-A to posi-
tion 1. The meter now measures the grid current of Set the meter switch in position 5. The meter now
the oscillator tube. Observe that this is between 4 and indicates the cathode current (total space current) of
70 scale divisions (0.07 to 1.2 milliamperes) for each of the r-f amplifier tube. Insert the tUlling wrench in the
the four channels. A reading outside these limits indi- opening marked ANT COUPLING in the front panel.
cates trouble, probably a defective crystal. Turn this con trol to the limi t of coun ter-c1ockwise
rotation to obtain minimum coupling. With the
(6) Oscillator Output Circuit. wrench in the opening marked HF AMP TUNING, ad-
Turn the meter switch to position 2. Insert the just the r-f amplifier output circuit (L<311) until a
tuning wrench in opelling 2 on the right-hand side of steady reading of the meter is obtained over several
the transmitter and adjust the inductor (L-302) in the turns of the adjusting nut. Note this reading as
oscillator plate circuit until a maximum det1ection of "detuned cathode current." It should be approxi-
the meter is obtained. Ordinarily, this should be be- mately 50 to 60 meter scale divisions (50 to 60 milli-
tween 25 alld 90 scale divisions, indicating 1.S to 5.4 amperes). Theil readjust HF AMP 'fU:\JNG for maxi-
milliamperes grid current ill the first harmonic mum dip (minimum current) as observed on the meter.
generator tube. Next, increase the ANT COUPU},;'G by turning clockwise
in small steps until the cathode current reaches about
(7) First Jlannonic Generator Out/mt Circuit. 90 per C('nt of the untuned cathode current observed
above. On each step, after changing the coupling, re-
\\7ith the meter switch still in position 2, insert the adjust the RF AMP TLTN!NG for maximum dip.
tuning wrench in opening .l~.\ on the right-hand side of
the transmitter and adjust. t.he tuning (L-303) of the (J I) Channels B, C, lInd D.
first harmonic generator plate circuit. It will be noted
that as this circuit is tuned, a major dip (usually 5 per Repeat steps (6) to (10) inclusive, for channels B,
cent or more) will occur in the IEeter det1ection." C, and D. All circuits of the transmitter are now
II nder some conditions one or more smaller dips m'ay properly tuned and matched to (Antenna A-85-A.
also be observed. Adjust the tuning (0 the bottom of However, they are not necessarily matched to the
the major dip; that is, to a miilil11l111l1l1eter deflection. transmission line and antenna of the aircraft.
Extreme care should be exercised here to avoid tuning
to any secondary or minor dip which may occur. ,If (12) Antenna Matching.
this l:S done, the transmitter will be tuned to lile wronf!,
Remove the artificial antenna and leconnect the
harmonic of the crystal and W1:U radiate on an un-
transmission line and aircraft antenna. Operate
authorized frequency.
channel selector push-button A and check that A
I
appears on tile channel indicator on the front panel of
(8) Second IIannonic Generator In/Jut Circuit.
the radio transmitter. Set the meter switch of Test
Turn the meter switch to position.) and adjust L-305 Unit I-ISS-A in position 5 (r-f amplifier space current).
of the input circuit of the second harmonic generator Reduce the ANT COUPLING to minimum by turning
through opening 3-11 on the Jpft-hand side of the tFans- the control in a counter-clockwise direction. Adjust
mitter. Adjust for maximum meter def-lection. Then, the HF AMP TUNING for maxirnum dip (minimum cur-
\yi1h the meter switch still in position 3, go back to rent) as observed on the meter. Then increase the
opening .H\ and make any necessary final readjust- ANT COUPLING by tuming the control in a clockwise
ment of L-303 to obtain a maximum meter reading. direction in small steps until the cathode current
This should be between 25 and 90, corresponding to reaches approximately 90 per cent of the cletul1ed
1.5 to 5.4 rniHiamperes grid current in the second har- cathode current, as deter'mined in (10) above. On
monic generator tube. each step, after changing the coupling, readjust the
RF AMP TUNING for maximum clip.
(9) Saond llarmonic Generator Output Circuit.
Turn the meter switch to position 4. Insert the NOTE
tuning wrench in opening 4 and adjust inductor L-308
in the output circuit of the second harmonic generator At some frequencies it may be found that
to get a maximum det1ection of the meter. This should minimum antenna coupling \,,"ill occur at
be between 20 and 80, indicating a grid current ill the some setting other than full counter~clock
r-f amplifier of 1.2 to 4.8 milliamperes. \vise rotation of the ANT COUPLING control,
18 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section II
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 3
and the direction of rotation of the control d. SQUELCH ADJUSTMENT OF VHF RE-
required to increase the antenna coupling CEIVER
may be reversed. In any casE', a setting
The squelch adjustment of the VHF receiver should
should be found which results in a cathode be made with the equipment connected to the antenna
current (with the RF A!l-IP TUNING adjusted for and with the main engines of the airplane operating.
maximum dip) equal to 90 per cent: of the \Vith the receiver in the l\:lVC condition. turn the
detuned cathode current. INCREASE OUTPUT knoh un til the background noise in
the headset is at a high level. Then~ go to the AVe
condition and turn the squelch control on the front of
the receiver until the squelch just fails to trip or trips
(13) Radiation Check.
only occasionally on spurts of noise. Check the adjust-
\.\"ith Indicator 1-106-A on the ground, or I he ment on the three remaining channels and readjust as
wing of the aircraft about 10 or 20 feet from t'lle an- nccess<-lry. Then tUrn the squelch control counterclock-
tenna, turn the tuning dial until a peak deflection of wise a very slight: amount (not more than 5 degrees).
the meter is obtaincd, while the transmit ter is being This adjustment must be made very carefully, since
operated on Channel A. The dial setting of the indi- an improperly adjusted squelch circuit GIll rnaterially
cator should correspond to the frequency assigned for degrade the performance of the receiver. The output
Channel A. Repeat on Channels 13, C, and D. If a oi the LF-MF-HF receivers should be disronnected
large error in frequency is observcd, it is probable that from the TEL circuit while this adjustment is heing
inductor L-303 in the plate circuit of the first harmonic made.
generator has been tuned to a minor clip rather than In this connection it should be not.ed that an im.
to the major dip referred to in step (7). III this case properly shielded ignition system or poor bonding at
repeat step (7) and the subsequent tuning procedure. any point of the airplane may cause high backgro.tind
Do not extend the antenna of the indicator any farther noise. This high noise level requires that the squelch
than is necessary to obtain the required sensitivity of be adjusted ~o a relatively insensitive condition, thus
measurement. (Otherwise, the indicator is likely to be reducing the over-all sensitivity of the receiver and the
damaged, as explained in Section V of this volume.) operating range.
RESTRICTED . 19
RESTRICTED Section III
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 1-4
OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT INVOLVES THE USE OF HIGH VOLTAGES WHICH ARE
DANGEROUS TO LIFE. OPERATING PERSONNEL MUST AT ALL TIMES OBSERVE ALL
SAFETY REGULATIONS. SEE SAFETY NOTICE ON PAGE IX OF THIS BOOK.
RESTRICTED 21
Sedlon III RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 5-8 AN 08-10-195
5.5WITCHING FROM AN LF-MF-HF CHANNEL TO A lower frequencies. Except in the case of near-by
VHF CHANNEL electrical storms, natUl'al static has relatively little
Press push button A, B, C, or D, on Control Unit effect.
C-30/ ARC-5, depending upon which of the VHF
channels is to be used. (This switches the VHF b. INTERCEPTION RANGE
transmitter and receiver to the channel selected, but Although the range of reliable communication is
leaves the LF-IVIF-HF receiver in operation; monitor- limited by the conditions pointed out above, signals
ing can be continued on it. No warm-up period for may sometimes be intercepted far beyond the optical
the VHF transmitter is necessary, since all transmitter range. Under certain anomalous or (( freak" condi-
tubes are kept hot during the time any transmitter is tions, readable signals may be heard several hundred
turned on.) miles beyond the horizon. Although these occasions
are relatively rare, they are unpredictable and may
6. TURNING OFF VHF TRANSMITTER occur at any time. Secu.rity requ.ires that' the possibil-
ity of interception by a distant enemy receiver always
Press the OFF push button on Control Unit be kept in mind.
C-30/ ARC-5. (This turns off all transmitters, MF,
HF, and VHF. It does not affect any of the receivers.)
c. AVC AND MVC OPERATION
7. TURNING OFF VHF RECEIVER As pointed out previously, the VHF receiver is
ordinarily used with AVC (automatic volume control).
Turn the MVC-OFF-AVC switch on Control Unit In this condition, the circuit automatically adjusts its
C-42/ ARC-S or C-43/ ARC-S to the OFF position. gain for varying signal strength; a substantially con-
(This turns off the VHF receiver but does not affect stant output is obtained over a very wide range of in-
the LF-MF-HF receivers or any transmitter.) coming signal strength. At the same time, the squelch
circuit is effective. This circuit operates to silence the
8. OPERATING NOTES receiver until a signal of predetermined level is re-
ceived. This level is determined by the squelch
a. OPERATING RANGE adjustment, which can be made at the face of the
The reliable operating range of the VHF com- receiver, but not at the control unit.
ponents of Model AN/ARC-S Aircraft Radio Equip-
When properly adjusted, the squelch feature spares
merIt is limited to a distance slightly greater than the
the pilot the annoyance of a continual roar in the
optical (line-of-sight) path. Thus, if both transmit-
headset due to background noise~in the absence of a
ting and receiving antennas are at zero or low alti-
signal, he hears nothing, except for an occasional noise
tudes, no more than a fe\v miles range can be coun ted
peak which causes a momentary spurt in the headset.
upon. When one or both antennas are elevated, and
If improperly adjusted, however, the squelch may fail
the distance to the horizon increased, the range is
to trip on weak signals which might otherwise be read.
correspondingly greater. However, extreme range
For this reason, if there is any doubt about the squelch
must not be expected at very high altitudes. For
adjustment, or if it is important to receive very faint
example, two aircraft flying at 20,000 feet are within
signals, the squelch should be turned off. This is done
the "line-of-sight" path when nearly 400 miles apart,
by switching to MVC (manual volume control).
yet it might be impossible to communicate over the
VHF channels. At this distance, the received sig- When MVC operation is used, the automatic gain
nals are of such low power that they may be lost or adjustment and squelch features mentioned above are
Iiswamped" in backgr-ound noise. Intervening ob- both disabled. Consequently, signal strength. as
structions, such as hills or mountains, may greatly heard in the headset, may vary over a considerable
reduce the operating range. range, and a more or less continuous noise background
The ability to receive weak signals, and conse- will be heard. The noise, particularly, may become
quently, the operating range, is very greatly influenced annoying after an extended period. For this reason,
by the electrical disturbances set up within the air- the MVC condition is ordinarily used only for short
craft. Improper shielding of the ignition system, intervals, and under the circumfitances outlined in the
generators, motors and other electrical apparatus will preceding paragraph.
reduce range. Inadequate or loose bonding of metal With either AVC or lVIVC operation, the pilot is able
parts will do the same. to adjust the average signal or noise level to a desired
Interference from natural electrical disturbances or value by operation of the L"l"CREASE OUTPUT knob on
static is materially less in the VHF band than at the radio control unit.
22 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section III
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph II
/'?/;$if
~-~-----~-
c::....~_'._~_~
-~==::::>
"/'l"/0'"' ''i$ ~'_
, WHAT USUALLY
HERE S HAPPENS
NO
SHADOW
, WHAT
C~~ SHAP PE N
RESTRICTED
Section ill RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 8-9 AN 08-10-195
d. TONE, CW, AND VOICE OPERATION happen. For this reason, it is advisable to block all
unused push buttons to prevent their accidental opera-
The VHF transmitter and receiver of Model
tion. This can be done in the manner explained in
AN / ARC-5 Aircraft Radio Equipment are designed
Section II of this volume.
for radio-telephone or I i voice" communication. They
are not particularly well suited for radio-telegraph
9. EMERGENCY OPERATION
operation. However, they may be used for this pur-
pose in an emergency (see Paragraph 9 of this section). The following suggestions should be considered for
use solely under emergency conditions ill which com~
To transmit CW or tone-modulated telegraph sig-
munication of some sort must be established in order
nals, it is necessary to turn the rotary switch on
to complete a ·mission. Designated units of the equip-
Control Unit C-30/ ARC-5 to the appropriate position.
ment are assumed to be defective or destroyed with no
Dots and dashes can then be sent by manipulation of
spares available. Most of the following emergency
the key, throttle switch Of microphone switch. Ope-
operations require access to the major units, and in
ration at speeds above 10 or 15 words per minute
some cases to the inside of major units, and are there-
should not be attempted, since the antenna transfer
fore not always practicable ill flight.
relay in the VHF transmitter is not designed for
high-speed operation, and may fail to follow the
keying. VHF RECEIVING EQUIPMENT
24 RESTRICTED
'RESTRICTED Section III
AN 08-10-195 Parag,aph 9
RESTRICTED 25
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
OVERLOAD
RELEASE--';II&
CLUTCH
K-l07-~••
K-IO
C-199
26 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seclion IV
AN 08-10-195 Pa,agraphs 1-2
1. INTRODUCTION NOTE
The mechanical and electrical characteristics of the The designations "0-101," itO-lOlA" and
VHF components of Model AN I ARC-S Aircraft Radio 110-102/' as used herein, are merely for con-
Equipment are described in this section. Correspond- venience in description and discussion. They
ing information on the LF-MF-HF components will be do not constitute code or stock numbers, and
found in Volume L should not be so used. Ordering information
is contained in "Table of Replaceable Parts/'
2. RADIO RECEIVER R-28/ARC-5 Section VI l.
Photographs.... . .. Figs. 2, 3,13,14, 17, 19~23,
50 and 51
b. CHANNEL SELECTOR 0-101 (AND O-IOIA)
Schematic Circuits.,. . .Figs. 4,15, 16, 18, 24~31,
61,62,63 and 64
The first 400 Receivers R-28/ ARC-S (serial num-
Wiring Diagrams... . ... Figs. 68-7:5
bers I to 400) were manufactured with selector 0-101.
Dimensions and Weights ... Fig. 5S
The next 3,080 receivers (numbers 401 to 3480) were
a. GENERAL MECHANICAL ARRANGE- equipped with a slightly modified form of this selector
MENT which is designated O-IOIA. The general arrangement
of these earlier selectors is shown in Figure 1.4. The
Radio Receiver R-281 ARC-S is designed to mount functioning of the mechanism is shown schematically
in the space provided on the mounting racks described in Figures 15 and 16.
in Volurn~ 1. Removable covers, one of which is pro-
vided with louvres, afford proj'ection against mechan- Referring to Figure 15, it will be seen that there are
ical injury and at the same time provide for adequate four tuning cams, one associated with each of the
ventilation. The general structural arrangement of channels A, B, C, D. Each cam is adjustable, in
the receiver is apparent from the photographs of respect of its angular position on the cam shaft, from
Figures 2. 3 and 13. Owr-all dimensions and weights the front of the receiver. Also, each of the cams is
are given in Figure 55. associated with an extension of the armature of the
corresponding relay (K-lOS. K-I06, K-l07 or K-I08).
The receiver is tuned to anyone of four pre-set fre-
When the relay is energized by the operation of the,,';
quency channels by the operation of a motor-driven
corresponding push button of the remote control unit",
selector mechanism. This, in turn, is controlled by
(Control Unit C-30/ ARC-5), its armature mov~~;
push-button type switches in a control unit (Control
until it is in contact with the associated cam. The::<~~
Unit C-30/ ARC-S). The selector, in carrying out its
motion is sufficient to release the mechanical latch ot7~
functions, performs two operations:
any relay previously operated. The battery supply ,
l--It rotates the main tuning capacitor of the circuit to the motor (B-I01) is thereby dosed and the
receiver to the proper position. motor is started. The motor shaft is connected to the
selector cam shaft through two worm reduction gears
2-It connects the proper one of four oscillator
such that the shaft revolves at approximately 30 rpm.
crystals into the circuit.
Rotation continues until the armature of the energized
Two different types of selector have been used in relay is in line with the notch of its associated cam.
Radio Receiver R-281ARC-S. The earlier type. which I t then drops into the notch, stopping the cam shaft ....
in this handbook is designated selector 0-101 (or and opening the circuit to the motor. The overl0a4f';;~
O-IOIA), was used in the first 3.480 receivers. The late!' release dutch shown in the shaft between the motof<t~'
type, referred to as selector 0-102, has been used in all and the cams permits the motor to coast to a stop'~:~~
subseq'!ent production. Although they are different after the cam shaft has been locked. At the same ti~;"f~
in mechanical design and construction, both types of the circuit to one of the four crystal~connecting relaya-,~:t;
selector attain the same result; namely, rotation of the is closed, thus causing the operation of the relay a~Yf5,
tuning capacitor shaft and connection of the proper the connection of the proper crystal to the oscillat~i\;~'
crystal. Each of the two types is described separately circuit. Also, the circuit to the channel'selecting re~~r~:J
in the following paragraphs. itself is opened. It does not restore to its normaf',',!-\:
RESTRICTED
Secfion IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
~W900' OOZO I,
I,
I,
~~'!i,:,:!
o •
:
o t;;ei I
~~
• I
"
,0----1
" I
L-~ I
I
<;,
o
28 RESTRICTED
RESTRiCTED Section IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph :2
position, however, since the armature is engaged and may best be understood by reference to the functional
held in position by a mechanical1atch. schematic diagram of Figure 18. The drawing shows
the selector in the position corresponding to channel A.
It will be seen that, as a result of the above sequence
of operations, the cam shaft of the selector unit is Assume that the push hutton for some other chan-
mechanically locked in a position which was pre- nel, f{)r example C, is depressed at the control unit.
determined' by the setting of the tuning cam. Since Ground from the control unit reaches relay K-250
the shaft is connected to the tuning capacitor shaftt:. through the channel con trol lead and the closed sector
of the receiver through a 1-to-1 ratio train of anti- of switch 5-251; the relay operates. The relay, in
backlash gears, the tuning capacitors are also locked operating, connects battery and ground to the motor
in a pre-determined position. As previously men- brushes in the proper polarity to cause counter-
tioned, the appropriate crystal is also connected to the clockwise rotation. The four pawl seIec'ting cams,
oscillator circuit. The receiver is thus tuned to the and switches 5-251, 5-252 and 5·253, are driven
required frequency. The frequency (in megacycles) is through the worm reduction geari'ng and the over-
indicated, approximately, by the dial at the front of running (one-way) clutch, 0-251, After the cam shaft
the tuning unit. has rotated through part of a revolution, the pawl-
selecting cam for channel A is disengaged from its
With the 0-101 selector, as shown, a difficulty is corresponding tuning pawl. All pawls are then in
sometimes encountered in operation at low tempera- their normal or unoperated position. Switch 5-250
tures. The construction of the overload release clutch then restores to normal under control of its retractile
is such that in certain positions its cam and roller slJring.
impose a comparatively heavy load on the motor.
When a new selection is to be made, the motor may A short time later, pawl-selecting cam C allows its
then have insufficient starting torque to overcome the pawl to drop until it is in contact with its tuning cam.
load. In order to overcome this difficulty, a modified The pawl then rides upon the face of the tuning cam,
selector, designated O-lOlA, was used in later pro- (eady to drop into its slot. The circuit between
duction. In this unit, which is shown schematically ground at the control unit and relay K-250 is now
in Figure 16, switch S-101 and its associated cam were opened p.t switch S-251; the relay releases, reversing
added. This closes the motor circuit, regardless of the the connections to the brushes of the motor.' The
position of the other elements of the selector, as long motor reverses, and starts to turn in a clockwise
as the clutch is in the high-torque position. This direction. The tuning cams rotate (they did not
insures that the motor wil1 start on the next -selection. rotate during the previous counter~clockwise opera-
The modified selector also includes a brake to reduce tion of the motor, due to the one-way action of dutch
the coasting of the motor after its circuit has been 0-250). The pawl-selecting shaft and cams stop, due
opened. to the one-way action of clutch 0-2S1, which permits
rotation only during the counter-clockwise operation
c. CHANNEL SELECTOR 0-J02 of the motor. When tuning cam C has rotated to the
position where its slot is in line with the pawl, the
All Radio Receivers R·28/ ARC-5, after the first
pawl drops into the slot, locking the tuning shaft and
3,480, were manufactured with selector 0-102. The
the tuning capacitors in the pre-determined position.
improvement in operation which was thereby obtained
The motor and main drive shatt can coast to a stop,
may be summarized as follows: With the older selectors
due to the overload release feature of clutch 0·250.
it is possible to obtain a If runaway" condition, in which
At the same time that pawl D operates to lock the
the selector motor continues to operate indefinitely
tuning shaft, it causes switch 5·250 to operate. This
after the control unit push buttons have been operated
opens the battery supply circuit to the motor and
in a certain sequence. For example, if the pilot oper-
short circuits the brushes, thus providing a dynamic
ates the A, n, cor D channel button, and then, within
braking action.
less than six seconds, operates button 2, 3 or OFF, the
VHF selection may not be completed and the mptor Switch 5-252 is sometimes called a ((safety switch."
may continue to operate until power is removed, until If for any reason a pawl fails to drop into its slot,
the motor burns out, or until button A, B, C or D is 5-252 opens the battery supply circuit to the motor
re~operated. This is the reason for the caution re-
brushes. This prevents continued rotation of the
garding rapid succession in push button operation motor. Switch 5-253 closes a circuit from battery to
which appears elsewhere in this text. With the new one of the four crystal selecting relays, depending upon
selector, 0-102, this possibility is removed. which channel is selected. The relay, as explained
The general arrangement of the 0-102 selector is later in this volume, connects the proper crystal to
shown in the photographs of Figure 17. Its operation the oscillator circuit of the receiver.
RESTRICTED 29
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
;JW900· 6610
"W900' oo~o
II
"
,
I"
I
"
I
~
,
I 6 ij
tG~--~---l II
"o
u
u
I "
u
I •
,
~
o"
o _ _ _ _ _-.-~ I
+ I
I
=--=-
,J
• ~
" 0
u
d
Z
Z
~
" "
30 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 2
TUNING-UNIT
I
PAWL
SELECTING
CAMS
E-250
RESTRICTED 31
..,w ... ."
0
t! "o·
!l.
'" "
~
Q
":r.., <:
TO TUNING
CAPACITOR SHAFTS
,
CHANNEL 0
,,
CHANNEL C
, ,
I
} TO CRYSTAL
~
CHANNEL B
, l CONNECTING
RELAYS
c
CHANNEL A
I
'I
I
~
~ ' I I I
c;;
I /~ ~~~;~R~~\~n __ \r\CN1~G (.A~-0 ~ ~_--+--,
V>
!!..
~
+28V-
/ "
/"
(,,, auG '
/~ n1 ~ 9P ~~~
0- L . I_ _
»
'"
m
0
~
J/ z '"m
....
II>
9 " "50 g, ~
'"Ei 0
[ ~ " '~ .. I ,_I Ei'"
m
1:1
'"I
V>
n
".
~
~g~~n
°r~I.L~
~~~ ..I.
I
,~~, I
______ t..... ________ .
.I
/
L___________ !., ________
/
, / -
'?
~
m
1:1
3
Jt
I ~./_~ ~..J
Q
;f. , -.J
;..----~-- -PAWL-SELECTING CAMS
Nl~
a
~
~T8
n
§.. 0-102 SELECTOR
!T{t{~
, ~
L ________ _
«
c» '" u
mr>') to
0.0 0.0 U) 0
,TI
uuu
",
0
>
'",
0
>- ,...
Cl>
'"0, U
>
'"
.:..
'"2
>-
0
,-
>
..
2
.:..
RESTRICTED 33
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
ID
o
"-
'"0, ,
'"
<J
>
5'!
~
,
~O
'"
0.1-
>
0t;
Oro
t-~
ON 0">
,-
NN -'-'
....
°
l- '"
T
u N
<:>
,
>
2,
>
o
,
-,
34 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seclion III
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph :2
.,
,
~
_,-I'"
,
..J
RESTRICTED 35
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
«~
~! '"
uu
'",
'"
,"
0
'" .,
,'"
,
u
, ,o
I--
--'
36 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Sedion IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 2
K-II04--i!c
K-I02- r
E-I 01----..,;,,.,
$-250
RESTRICTED 37
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
38 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seelion IV
AN 08·10·195 Paragraph 2
applied to the tuned circuit consIst1l1g of variable powdered iron core axially within the form on which
capacitor ('-lOSB and unit Z-102. This latter unit is L-I05 is wound. Fixed capacitor C-122 provides the
similar in action to Z-101. In Z-102, the capacitive bulk of the capacitance required in the resonant cir-
reactance of C-112 is negligibly small. The inductive cuit. Although only one capacitor is indicated across
reactance of the leads of this capacitor at the fre- each of the i-f resonant circuits in Figure 62, two capa-
quencies involved, however, is not negligible. As a citors possessing negative temperature co-efficients
result, from an r-f point of view, this circuit element are used in each case. Coupling between the primary
presents an impedance which is inductive in nature. and secondary circuits is accornplished by transformer
It therefore appears as an inductor in Figure 25. As action between the primary and secondary windings.
in the case of Z-101, the net result may be considered (4) First I-F Amplifier (V-103)
the equivalent of 'l..,.vapped inductor. The voltage
developed acroS-S"';lle impedance of C-112 is coupled The voltage developed across coil L-I06 and capaci-
to the grid' circuit of the succeeding stage through tor C-125 (tuned to 6.9 megacycles) is applied to the
C-l,Ll and L-I04. The capacitive reactance of C-113 grid of the first i-f amplifier tube V-I03. The output
is'small in comparison \vith the inductive reactance of voltage of this stage appears across the primary of
L-I04. Since the tuned input circuit of the succeeding 2-105, which is similar to that of 2-104. Three features
stage is similar to the output circuit of the r-f ampli- of this amplifier should be observed. In the first
fier, tlw equivalent coupled circuits may be considered place, the grid circuit is returned to the AVC lead.
to resemble those shown in Figure 25. The plate Secondly, the cathode return is completed through the
voltage, fed to this stage through de-coupling resistor a
cathode resistor to the MVC lead. Thirdly, voltage
D, is prevented from appearing on the grid of the divider composed of R-112 and R-113 is present in
succeeding stage by blocking capacitor C-113. Capaci- the grid-cathode circuit. These resistors are in series
tor C-112 prevents the d-c high voltage from being across the AVC and MVC leads. Their junction is
short-circuited. connected to the grid of V-I 03 through the secondary
circuit of 2-104. In this way, both the automatic and
manual volume control voltages applied to this tube
CtOSB CliO CIII! ~LlO2 ;}'L 103 CIIS (.116 CIOSC are reduced. This reduction in the control voltages is
I
necessitated by the fact that the tube employed for
V-103 (Tube VT-288, JAN-12SH7) has a sharper
- Clt2 Clt3 Ll04 CII4 cut-off characteristic than that employed for V-101
(Tube VT-269, JAN-717A). The voltage divider
Figure 25-R-F Amplifier Output-Equivalent Circuit therefore insures satisfactory volume control action in
both stages from the voltage supplied by common
(3) Mixer (V-10Z) con trot leads.
The voltage impressed on the grid of the mixer is (5) Second J-F Arnj}lijier (V-l04)
composed not only of the signal impulses, coupled
from 2-102 as previously described. but also of the Except for the fact that neither automatic nor
output from a local source of high-frequency. It manual volume control voltage is applied to it, the
should be observed that, since the grid circuit is second i-f stage resembles the first stage. The cathode
returned directly to ground through R-107 and R-108 of V-I04 returns to ground through R-124 and R-125
in series, the mixer is not subject to AVe action. in series. The junction of these resistors is connected
Test-point D is provided for maintenance purposes. .to the grid circuit through R-122 and the secondary
The cathode is returned to ground through cathode of 2-105, while the cathode is connected to the other
bias resistor K. The functions of the remaining end of R-124. Therefore, bias applied to this tube
resjstors and capacitors are similar to those of the consists of the voltage drop across R-124 (approxi-
corresponding elements in the r-f amplifier circuit. mately 2 volts). The total potential drop developed
across the two resistors in series (37 volts) is applied
The interaction of the signal voltage in the 100 to to the squelch circuit and will be considered in more
156-megacycle range with the r-f voltage from the detail later in this section.
local SOurce in the grid circuit of the mixer produces
the usual resultants in the plate circuit. The tuned (6) Detector ( V-lOS)
primary of the intermediate frequency transformer, As indicated in Figures 26 and 62, one triode section
Z-104, selects the desired intermediate frequency of (terminals 4,5 and 6) of tube V-lOS is used as a diode
6.9 mc (the difference between the signal and the local detector. The grid and cathode constitute the two
source). As in the case of ail resonant circuits in the active elements of the diode. The plate plays no part
i-f section, the primary of Z-104 is tuned by varying in the detector action; it is connected to the cathode
the inductance. This is accomplished by moving a merely.to minimize the input capacitance of the tube.
RESTRICTED 39
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
C149 RI36
RI40 CI55
we
V104
1.106
5_
, , /
,
---.------., , \VIOS I
--- I I
, -,
,IDET \
,, , VIC6
1ST
I
\ C145: AF
I L110 I AMP
~53A
T I
I
I
RI28 I RI30 RI31
I
=- _..JI :x:-
_J:'::. ___ ,!:C144
I C147 ,*C150
L
As a result of the rectifying action of the diode and across L-llO. The time constant of the network
the drop across load resistors R-130 and R-131, the consisting of C-144, C-147, C-150, R-128, R-130 and
potential across capacitor C-147 varies at an audio- R-131 is large in comparison with the period of an i-f
frequency rate corresponding to the modulation of the cycle. Therefore, the d-c voltage across C-144 does
incoming signal. This a-f potential is applied via not decrease substantially during the succeeding
C-149 and R-136 to the grid of the first a-f triode negative half-cycle. The significance of this fact will
(terminal I of V-106). Capacitor (-155, connected be pointed out in subsequent paragraphs of this
across a portion of the grid return of the fIrst a-f section.
amplifier, reduces the response to unwanted higher (7) A VC Circuit (V-lOS)
audio frequencies. Capacitor C-153A serves as an The delayed automa tic volume control circuit, with
a-f grid return. its associated circuits, is shown schematically in Figure
The capacitance of C-144 (100 mm£.) is small in 27. Its operation is illustrated by the partial schematic
comparison with the capacitance of C-ISO (6,000 of Figure 28. Both tbe detector, which utilizes one
mmL). Consequently, when the diode conducts on triode section of V-IDS, and the AVC rectifier, which
the positive half-cycle (i.e" when the upper end of uses part of the other section of the same tube, operate
coil L-l10 is positiveL capacitor C-144 is charged to a as diodes, For this reason they are shown as diodes
voltage nearly equal to the peak value appearing in Figure 28, which disregards the inactive elements.
ISTIFA
VI03
IZSH7
,
LlOI Lloe
l' +220V.
VI1f4,,,, r
Zl06
---------1
Z AVC
.
--- I
,,,
RI33 ! C 159
~ ;, LIO'J LIIO
.,-r-c.J.M:'-";'rI.f-;j.
,,
I ,
,IL 0
;J;
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...1 RI34
J-220V.
40 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Sedion IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 2
I t will be observed that the cathode of the A VC ground. The negative voltage developed across R-13S
rectifier and the effective plate (actually the grid) of is applied to the grid of the first i-f amplifier through
the detector are connected together, and that the the low-pass filter consisting of 1<.-123 and C-131B.
plate of the former is connected through C-151 to the The control voltage to the r-f amplifier grid is filtered
cathode of the latter. In other words, the two diodes further by R-120 and C-131A. The time constant of
are connected back-ta-back from an i-f viewpoint. As the filter must be sufficiently large to remove not only
a result, when an i-f voltage is impressed across these the r-f, but also the a-f, or modulation, ripple if satis-
t\,-:o tubes they conduct on oppo'site half-cycles. For factory results are to be obtained. The A VC voltage
example, when the upper end of L-ll0 is positive, thus acts to maintain the mean signal (carrier) level
current will flow through the detector diode. When constant by varying the sensitivity of the receiver,
the upper end is negative, current will flow through Load resistor R-138 offers approximately 75 per cen t
the AVC diode. of the total resistance in the doc path for the Ave
rectifier. As a result, the peak doc voltage developed
Ave
RECTIFIER "cross this load is approximately equal to 75 per cent
of the total peak voltage effective around the circuit.
Cl51 This latter voltage is approximately equal to twice the
+ litO
peak voltage developed across L-110 (owing to. the
R!3B
DET action of C-144 previously discussed) less the delay
RI28 R130 R13) ,E _
'I
bias. Capacitors C-131A 'and C-131B in the R-C
~:CI44 J;C!47 *C150 filter charge to the resultant mean peak voltage and,
owing to the time constant of this circuit, maintain
Figure 28-AVC Rectifier-Partial Schematic Circuit this charge over a number of r-f cycles. Therefore the
AVC voltage is approximately equal to 75 per cent of
As previously mentioned, C-144 is charged nearly to the difference between twice the mean peak signal
the peak value of voltage appearing across L-ll0 dur- voltage across L-ll0, and the delay bias. The effec-
ing the positive half-cycle by detector action. Observe tiveness of the AVe circuit is thus enhanced.
that the upper plate of C-144 is negative with respect
to ground under this condition. As'a result, during the As explained previously, the delay bias for the A VC
negative half-cycle (when the upper end of L-1JO is is derived from voltage divider R-137, 1<.-134. Con-
sequently, the amount of delay is determined by the
negative) the voltage across C-144 and that across
L-l10 are in series aiding, and the total peak voltage voltage drop across R-134. When the AVC-MVC
s\vitch in the control unit is in the MVC position, this
available is approximately doubled. The electron fiow
from rectification iselownward through R-138, through voltage is approximately 50 volts. When the switch
the element indicated as battery E, resistors R-131, is in the AVe position, however, R-134 is shunted by
R-130. R-128, and through L-110 back to the'cathode the combination of R-133 and R-2S0 in series. Under
this condition, the voltage applied as a delay bias can
of the Ave rectifier.
be varied between approximately 10 and 50 volts by
In the actual receiver circuit, battery E is replaced adjustment of R-2S0.
by a voltage derived from the voltage divider, con-
sisting of resistors 1<.-137 and R-134 (see Figure 27). When properly made, the AVe action can be
I t will be seen that the negative end of this battery is depended upon to control the output level of the re-
toward the A VC rectifier plate and the positive end is ceiver over a wide range of received signal strength.
toward the cathode. In the absence of a signal, the When the switch in the control unit is turned to the
cathode is, therefore, positive with respect to the MVC position, the constant delay bias of 50 volts
plate. Since a rectifier will conduct only when its serves to prevent overloading on stronger- signals.
cathode is negative with respect to the plate, no space Manual volume control is depended upon to adjust
current fiows unless the signal peak voltage is greater the receiver to accommodate different signal strengths.
than this initial bias. The AVe action therefore is of As previously mentioned, resistors R-112 and R-113
the II delayed" variety; i.e" no control takes place un- in the grid circuit of the first i-f amplifier constitute a
less the level of the incoming Bignal exceeds a certain voltage divider to reduce the control voltage applied
pre-determined value, It will be noticed that the to this tube. C-128A is an r-f by-pass capacitor which
action of the detector diode is independent of this serves as a feed-through insulator at the point where
delay bias. the Ave line passes through the shield surrounding
When the AVe rectifier conducts, electrons fiow the r-f circuits, This insulator button, howeiver, is
downward through load resistor R-138. The upper constructed to afford approximately 500 {J.[J.f capaci-
end of this resistor is therefore negative with respect to tance between the lead and the shield (which is
RESTRICTED 41
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
'~~'O'
RI29 RI35
nn. As in the case of the AVe action explained above,
t he peak r-f voltage applied across the squelch rectifier
S V
tel48 ~CI9B .,
('ircuit during a negative half-cycle is approximately A C128B RI33
~~3A
CIS9
equal to double the peak voltage across inductor L-I10. oF
R250
"l
The squelch rectifier is similar to the detector circuit '~:C12BC Ave MVC RI41 RI42 RI39
5415
in that current flow, which results from rectification, RI37 RB4
~Fi97
occur:o; ill a closed circuit which is independent of +220V. .. Rl25 RI24
,~
ground, This path includes the squelch load resistor, ~
+220V,
R-132, resistors R-131, R-130 and R-I28, inductor
L-II0, as well as the grid and cathode of the tube. Figure 30-Squelch -Amplifier-Partial Schen;lOtic Circuit
Since the closed path does not include ground at any
point the voltage from the divider composed of R-137 If, OIl the other hand, S is greater than V, the grid of
and R-134 has no bearing on the operation of the the squelch amplifier is negative with respect to its
squelch rectifier itself. The current through R~132 cathode. Space current is reduced, or may be nil.
causes the upper end of this resistor to be negative The (',onsequent potential drop across R-141 is COlre-
with respect to the lov,lcr end, which is connected to spondingJy reduced. In this condition the squelch
the voltage divider. A description of the use of the amplifier contributes little or nothing to the bias of the
poten tial drop ac1'O.s.,,> R-132 is given later. first a-f amplifier tube. Plate current flows in the
42 RETSRICTED
RESTRICTED Section IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 2
normal manner and audio frequencies appearing on operation is available only when 5-415 is in the Ave
the grid are <lmplifted. The first a-f stage is not dis- posltlOn. When 5-415 is in the MVC position, the first
abled. a-f stage operates normally at all times,
Referring to Figures 30, 31 and 62, it will be seen The voltage required for the plate of the squelch
that battery S actually represents the potential drop amplifier tube is derived from the voltage drop across
across the squelch rectifier load, R-132. Its voltage resistors R-124 and R-125 in the cathode circuit of the
tlwrefore depends upon the strength of the received second i-f amplifier tube, V-I04. The cathode current
signal. Resistors 1<-129 and R-l53, together with of this tube is approximately 9 milliamperes under
capacitors C-148 and C-198, constitute a filter for the operating conditions. This current, flowing through
rectifIed voltage and also tend to prevent the squelch the combined resistance of the two resistors mentioned
amplifier from responding to sudden bursts of static. (4,120 ohms) causes, by Ohm's law, a drop of 37 volts.
If S-415 is in the Ave position, and if the rectified This is the voltage represented symbolically by the
signal voltage, 5, is less than voltage V t the first a-f 37-volt battery in Figure 31.
amplifier is disabled. It will be seen from Figure 62
(II) First A-F Amplifier (V-106)
that battery V represents the voltage drop across
variable resistor R-250 (which is part of the voltage Aside from its interconnection with the squelch
divider composeo. of the additional resistors R-133, circuit, described in the preceding paragraphs, the
R-134, and 1<-137 when S-415 is in the Ave position). first a-f amplifier is conventional. Some degree of
By varying this resistor, the voltage may be varied degeneratio~ (negative feed-back) results from the fact
within the approximate range of 0 to 50 volts. In that the cathode bias resistor, R-142, is not by-passed
order to restore the first a-f amplifier to normal for audio frequencies, The output audio voltage
operating condition, the rectified signal voltage applied developed across load resistor R-139 is coupled to the
to the squelch amplifier must be sufficiently. great to input of the second a-f amplifier through resistor R-143
overcome the voltage across R-250 and to supply and capacitor C-154. Capacitor C-153A in the grid
cut-off bias to the squelch amplifier stage. Therefore circuit serves as an a-f by-pass around resistor R-141.
the adjustment of R-250 determines, within limits, R-140 provides a grid return and at the same time
the signal strength required to restore the first audio prevents the a-f voltage from being short-circuited.
stage to normal operating condition, Incidentally,
(12) Second A-F Ampl1jier.
R-250 determines the point at which the squelch
operates and the delay bias for the AVC rectifier. The second audio-frequency amplifier, \vhich em-
Although R-250 is pre-set for the desired squelch ploys a beam-power tube, is a conventional resistance-
operation, the circuit is so designed that an appropriate capacitance coupled stage. Capacitor C-157 across
adjustment of delay bias is made simultaneously. output transformer T -101 provide some shaping of the
audio response characteristics, Bias is supplied by
AUDIO
cathode resistor R-145, which is by-passed by C-I96.
INPUT
1-
AUDIO
OUTPUT The output transformer is provided with a tapped
1ST secondary to accommodate high or low impedance
, RI40 I
AFA
: headsets. It should be observed that the plate circuit
,
SOl
+
VOLTAGE
FROM
SQUELCH
RECTIFIER
t-
,(
+
RI41
" , 2
RI42 RI39
of this amplifier is returned directly to the positive
high-voltage brush of the dynamotor, while the screen
grid, together with all the other positive high-voltage
circuits, is returned through L-12!. Resistor 1<.-168,
V +
RI33 ± 37V connected across the primary of transformer T-l01, i" a
J-- +220\1. silicon carbide unit (Thyrite varistor). Its resistance
varies markedly with the impressed voltage: at: low
Figure 31-Squelch Amplifier-Equivalent Circuit voltage, the resistance is very high, and at high volt-
age, the resistance is low. It thus acts as a variable
When S-415 is in the MVC position, R-250 is dis- protective shunt, which automatically provides a short
connected from its ground return, The full voltage circuit across the transformer when high-voltage
drop of approximately 50 volts across R~134 is then surges, due to sv.dtching or other causes, would other-
applied to the cathode of the squelch amplifier. Since wise cause breakdown of the windings.
the plate voltage is in the order of only 37 volts, the
(13) Output Circuit.
cathode is positive with respect to the plate, and no
plate current flows in this tube. Therefore no voltage An audio volume control bridged across the output
is developed across load resistor R-141, and the first circuit of the receiver is provided in the associated
a-f stage operates normally. In other wprds, squelch remote control unit. This control comprises two
RESTRICTED 43
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 2 AN 08-10-195
potentiometers ganged to the INCREASEOUTPUTcontrol. twelfth harmonic. Resistor R-156 (12 ohms) in the
One poten1"jometer is provided for high impedance plate lead serves as a suppressor of parasitic oscilla-
headsets, and the other for low. This volume control, tions. The combination of capacitor C~176 and in-
or a-f level control, is employed primarily to provide ductor L-114, as well as the combination of C-178 and
the desired headset volume with full AVC action. The L-116, presents an inductive reactance. As a result,
reason is that, while full AVC keeps the output of the the points between which the circuits are coupled by
receiver relatively constant over a range of input C-177 (which actually appears as a small inductor)
signals, additional provision must be made for adjust- are equivalent to taps on the inductors in Z-109 and
ing the output for comfortable headset volume. This Z-110. C-177 prevents positive high voltage from
control is not provided to alter the sensitivity of the appearing at the grid of V-llO. Terminal i t B" of
set in accommodating various signal strengths. It Z-110 is employed for testing purposes.
governs the headset level for a given set of conditions,
(16) Second IIarmonic Generator (V-ll0).
and normally is allowed to remain fixed while full AVe
IS 111 use.
Tube V-110 functions as a second harmonic gen-
erator. Its input circuit is tuned to the twelfth
Resistor R-412A, ganged to the same shaft, how-
harmonic of the crystal frequency and its output to the
ever, is used to accommodate the receiver to various
twenty-fourth harmonic. It will be noticed that the
signal strengths when 5-415 is in the MVC position.
plate tank circuit (Z-I11 combilwd with C-IOSH)
(14) Oscillator (V-J08). is followed by an additional tuned circuit (Z-112 and
C-I05I). The coupling between these units is similar
Referring to Figure 62, it will be seen that the
to that employed between the r-f stage and the mixer.
heterodyne oscillator is of the crystal-controlled
Terminal II C" is a test point.
harmonic type. The frequency is determined by the
COil nect ion of one of four crystals CY -101, Y -102, Y -103, (17) Channel Selection.
Y -104) to the grid of tube V-lOS. It will be noted that Each VHF receiver is normally equipped with four
capacitor C-165 is relatively large (1000 mmf); con- crystals for determining the frequency of the local
sequently, the screen is practically at ground poten- oscillator) and thereby the frequency to which the
tial at radio frequencies. In effect, then, the crystal receiver will respond. The resonant circuits of the r-f
is effectively connected between the grid and screen. amplifier) oscillator and harmonic generator stages are
Capacitors C-163 and C-164 constitute an r-f voltag,e tuned by means' of nine ganged rotary capacitors. In
divider, the mid-point of which is connected to the order to select a particular channel, therefore, it is
cathode. The resulting difference of r-f potential necessary to rotate the variable capacitors to the
het\n'en the cathode and grid provides the feed~back proper position and to connect the proper crystal.
\\"hich is necessary to sustain oscillations.
The rotation of the ganged capacitors to the proper
The plate tank circuit is resonated at the fourth position is effected by means of selector O~101! selector
harmonic of the crystal frequency by means of coil O-IOIA or selector 0-102, depending upon the date at
L-11l and capacitors C-105]) and C-166. The trim- which the particular receiver was manufactured. These
ming of coil L-lll, as \\'ell as of all other coils in the selectors were described in some detail in an earlier
oscillator-harmonic generator and r-f stages, is ac~ parr of this section. The selector also closes a circuit
complished by means of silver-plated brass screws. to one of four crystal selecting relays, K-I0C K~102)
An)' one of four crystals (Y-101, Y-102, Y-103, K-I03 and K-I04. This causes the relay to operate
Y ~ 104) ,can be connected to the oscillator circuit by the and connect the proper crystal to the'grid circuit of
o!wration of the appropriate crystal selecting relay the oscillator.
1i<-lOl, K-l02. K-l03, K-I04).
(18) Receiver Power Supply.
(15) First IIarmonic Generator (V-109).
The 28-volt aircraft storage battery is connected to
The out put of the oscillator stage is coupled to the the receiver through switch 5-416 in the remote control
input circuit through capacitor C-168 (see Figure 62). box. This switch is actuated by the same shaft as the
.-\t 1"he frequencies involved in this part of the circuit MVC-OFF~AVC switch. Its circuit is closed when the
(four times the crystal frequency), capacitors C-167, latter is in either the MVC or Ave position. It is open
('-168 and C-169 offer a capacitive reactance. Ter- when the switch is i'n the OFF position. The 28~volt
minal i i A," at the junction of resistors R-153 and current is fed to the low voltage side of Dynamotor
R-154, is for testing purposes. *DY-2/ARR-2 through low pass filter C-15S, L-121
The first harmonic generator operates as a frequency and C-1S3B. This serves to reduce noise arising from
tripler. Its input circuit is tuned to the fourth har- commutator' ripple. Condenser C-34, connected
mOlllC of the crystal, and its output is tUlled to the directly across the low voltage brushes, serves to by~
44 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 2-3
pass any radio frequency currents arising from spark- to which it can be tuned. These tuned circuits are
ing at the brushes. mounted in rotatable turrets 2-301, 2-302, 2-303
which are connected, through a system of shafting and
gearing, to tuning motor B-301. This motor, in com~
3. RADIO TRANSMITTER T-23/ARC-5
bination wit.h a system of relays and switches -to be
Photographs... . . . . . .. ". Figs. 2, 5, 32· ..-35 described later, rotates the turrets to a position where
Schematic Circuit .. , ...... Figs. 60 and 6S the proper tuned circuits are connected into the circuit.
\Viring Diagram ........... Fig. 74 The appropriate crystal for each transmission channel
Dimensions and Weights ... Fig. 55 is connected into the circuit by the operation of one of
the spril1g combinations of switch S-313 (on the under
a. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS side of the chassis). The operation of the proper
springs is effected by a cam on, turret Z-302, acting
Radio Transmitter T-23/ ARC-S is designed for through a plunger.
mounting in the space provided on the racks described
The tube sockets for the driver (second harmonic
in Volume 1.. A readily removable shield, which is
generator) and power amplifier tubes are of somewhat
provided with louvres, affords mechanical protection.
unusual construction, as indicated on the photographs
and adequate ventilation. The general mechanical
in Figure 35. This design minimizes stray circuit
arrangement of the transmitter 'is indicated on the
capacitances and inductances; all connections between
photographs in Figures 5, 32, 33, 34 and 35. Over-all
t.he tube elements and their respective tuned circuits
dimensions and weights are given in Figure 55.
are as direct and short as it is feasible to make them.
The transmitter is provided with four complete sets The two sockets, X-303 and X-304, are interchange-
of tuned r-f circuits, one for each of the four channels able.
Z-303
-.I
11--
RESTRICTED 45
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph 3 AN 08-10-195
L-305D
X-302.-,",
c..---V-:302
V-303
IJ...~--- C-30S
4
C-316-_
X-304
v- 304 ----,i-
ur:~,--c- C - 32 9A
C-329B
L-312A
C-32
'-n-
r
J-302
46 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seclion IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 3
R-326 __
V-3D I
-302
rr--1-313
L-301
R-315
RESTRICTED 47
Section IV RESTRICTED
Pa,agraph 3 AN 08-10-195
~----r-
X-3D3 P-303 (-310
X-304 P-304 C-317
48 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Sedion IV
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 3
(A, B, C or 0). These coils are located in turret shunt feed coils in the plate circuit. Resistor R-316
2-303 with coils L-305 (A, B, C and 0) .. The greater and capacitor C-322 furnish a decoupling network in
part of the fixed capacitance for the tuned circuit of the plate voltage supply.
V-302 is furnished by the output capacitance of this The output of V-304 is tuned by means of variable
tube. C-308 is a radio frequency by-pass capacitor. cores in inductors L-311 (A, B, C or D). The asso-
(3) Second IIarmonic Generator (V-303). ciated capacitance is largely contributed by the output
capacitance of V-304 together with the capacitance
The tuned plate circuit of the first harmonic gen-
presented by the various connecting leads. Coupling
erator is link-coupled to the tuned grid circuit of the
to the antenna is obtained by means of coils L-312
second harmonic generator tube V-303. This is a
(A, B, C and 0). This coupling is varied by antenna
push-pull beam power tube operating as a frequency
capacitors C-323 (A, B, C and 0). These inductors
tripler. The grid circuit is tuned -to the output fre-
and capacitors are located in turret 2-301 at the front
quency of V-302 by means of coils L-305 (A, B, C
of the chassis.
or D). The fixed capacitance of the tuned circuit is
largely furnished by the input capacitance of V-303 (5) Relays.
Inductors L-303 (A, B, C and 0) are located in the In order to control channel selection and to switch
right half of motor driven turret 2-303 and coils L-305 operating and modulating voltages, the circuit of
lA, B, C and 0) are located in the left half. Coupling Radio Transmitter T-23/ ARC-5 includes the following
between the two is achieved by means of links L-304 relays:
(A, B, C or 0). Radio-frequency by-pass capacitor
C-308 and resistors R-307, R-308 and R-309 are also K301-Antenna Switching Relay
contained in turret 2-303. Resistors R-308 and R-309 K-302-,Plate and Screen Voltage Control Relay
are grid leaks which furnish bias to the control grids of K-303-Modulated Screen Supply and Key
V-303 when r-f excitation is supplied. Cathode bias is Control Relay
K-304--Motor Control Relay
furnished by R-31O.
K-305--Auxiliary Plate and Screen Voltage
V-303 is mounted horizontally in a plug-in socket Control Relay
assembly shown as X-303 in Figure 65. This assembly K-306,-Modulated Plate Supply and Voltage
also _contains the by-pass capacitors, The output Regulator Interlock Relay
circuit of V-303 is tuned to the third harmonic of the
input frequency or the eighteenth harmonic of the The purpose of motor control relay K-304 is to close
crystal frequency, Tuning is accomplished by means the circuit of the tuning motor under control of the
of variable inductors L-308 (A, B, C or D). The channel' selecting push buttons in the control unit.
capacitance required is composed of trimmer capacitor Relays K-302, K-303, K-305 and K-306 are trans-
C-33S, the output capacitance of V-303 and the input mitter, enabling relays which furnish operating volt-
capacitance of V-304 in series with the capacitances of ages to the transmitter. These relays operate under
C-315 and C-316. The coils are located in the left- control of the channel selecting push buttons, but only
hand side of motor driven turret Z-302, Inductors after the motor relay has released. Thus plate voltage
L-306 and L-307 are shunt feed inductors ,for the is never applied while the turrets are being rotated by
plates of V-3()3. Resistor R-311 and capacitor C-314 the motor drive. The antenna switching relay K-301,
form a de-coupling network to the plate voltage under the control of the microphone push button,
supply. switches the VHF antenna from the receiver to the
transmitter.
(4) Power AmjJiijier (V-30·+).
Reference to Figure 65 will show that the wiliding of
The output of the second harmonic g<:;nerator is motor control relay K-304 is completed to ground at
coupled through capacitors C-315 and C-316 to the the channel switches A, B, C or 0 in the control
ra:1io-frequency pmver amplifier tube, \'-304. This is unit through the contacts of selection switch S-313.
a push-pull beam power tetrode which is plate and
screen modulated by audio-frequency pmver supplied The operation of relay K-304 closes the armature
by Modulator M 0-7! ARC-S. I t is mounted in socket circuit of the channel selection motor. This operates
assembly X-304, which also contains the radio-fre~ the motor, which in turn drives the turrets through a
quency by-pass capacitors. series of reduction gears.
Resistor R-315, mounted outside X-304, furnishes As turret 2-302 rotates, cams A, B, C and 0 operate
cathode bias to V-304. Resistors R-312 and R-313, spring assemblies A, B, C and 0 of ,switch S-313.
located in turret Z-302, furnish grid leak operating When the turret reaches the correct position for the
bias to the stage. Inductors L-30o and L-310 are channel selected, the circuit to the winding of motor
RESTRICTED 49
Section IV RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 3-4 AN 08-10-195
control relay K-304 is opened. The relay then re- This un.it includes the switches required for complt,te
leases, thereby removing battery and short circuiting control of one VHF transmitter and two IVIF'-HF
the motor armature. The motor stops. The lower transmitters of Model AN! ARC-S Aircraft Radio
pair of springs in the spring assembly of switch S-313 Equipment. It also provides for con11'0l of channel
dose, connecting the proper crystal to the oscillator selection of one VHF receiver.
circuit:. Relay K-304, in its released position, closes
Referring to the circuit schematic of Figure 7, it will
the operating path to the transmitter enabling relays,
be seen that- the battery supply to all transmitting
K-302, K-303, K-305 and K-306.
equipment, both MF~HF and VHF, is under control
Relay K-302 closes the plate and screen supply leads of push button switch OFF. When this button is de~
from the modulator unit to the various stages of the pressed, the battery supply circuit (terminals 15 and
transmitter. These leads are also connected through 18 of receptacle J -402) is opened, When it is released
contacts of K-305 in series with those of K-302. The by the op('ration of one of the other push buttons, the
purpose of the contacts in series is to prevent excessive the battery circuit is closed and the heatel- circuits of
arcing at high altitudes. all transmitting equipment are energized.
One set of contacts of relay K-303 controls' the The operation of push button A, H, C or D pJaces a
modulated screen voltage supply to the r-f power ground on terminal 1 of receptacle J-402. This action,
amplifier (V-304). The second set of contacts controls as can be seen by referring to Figure 60, causes relay
the voltage applied to the winding of the antenna K-303 to opE'"rate. This, in turn, prepares a circuit for
transfer relay. the operation of relay K-301 in the VHF' transmitter
One set of contacts of relay K-306 controls the under the control ~f the microphone push button. The
modulated plate voltage supply to the r-f power operation of push button A, B, C or D also causes re-
amplifier (V-304). The second set of contacts com- lays K-302 and K-305 to operate after relay K-403 has
pletes the circuit of the voltage regulator tube (located operated. \Vhen the microphone push button is de~
in the modulator) and assures that the voltage regu- pressed, relays K-52 and K-301 operate to connect the
lator is struck regardless of the position of the emission transmitter to the high-voltage supply and VHF
switch on the control unit. antenna. This is done through terminal 9 of J-402
and terminal 6 of J-401.
The antenna relay, K-301, is operated under the
joint control of relay K-303 and the microphone push The depression of push button A, H, C or D also
button. V/hen the push-to-talk button on the micro- grounds two of the channel selection leads to re-
phone is operated, K-301 transfers the VHF antenna ceptacle J-401. One of these (1, 2, 3 or 4) operates the
from Radio Receiver R-28/ARC-5, to Radio Trans- channel selector in the VHF transmitter through
mitter T-23/ ARC-5. terminals 1, 2, 3 or 5 of its receptacle J-309. Theother
(7,8,9 or 10) operates the channel selector in the VHF
The 24-28 volt supply for operating the relays is receiver through terminals 1, 2,4 or 5 of its receptacle
controlled by the OFF push button all the control unit:. J-l03.
Relay 1<-304 may operate from this supply whenever
one of the channel selector buttons A, B, C or D on the \~.rhen push button 2 or 3 is depressed, ground is
control unit is operated. So long as K-304 is operated, placed upon lead 2 or lead 3 of receptacle.T -402. This
however, K-3Q2, K-303, K-305 and K-306 are pre- ground causes one or the other of the ;\[F-HF' trallS-
vented from operating to close the high-voltage leads mitters to be selected and placed under control of the
until the turrets have ceased rotating and the motor microphone.
relay has released.
In older models of Contl'Ol Unit C-30/ ARC-S, pro-
vision was made for an additional switch in the micro-
4. CONTROL UNIT ColO/ARCoS phone circuit. This switch is no longer used, but the
Photographs .... ............ Fig. 6 stenciling may still be found and should be disre-
Schematic Circuit ................ Figs. 7 and 60 garded. The stenciling reads (I R in."
Wiring Diagram .. ".. . Fig. 75
Switch S-401, when turned to the TONE position,
Dimensions and Weights .......... Fig. 56
places ground on terminals 12, 13 ancl16 of receptacle
The general arrangement of Control Unit J-402. In addition, terminals 11 and 17 are connected
C-30/ARC-5 is shown on the photographs in Figure 6 together. These connections prepare the modulator
and in the outline _drawing in Figure 56. The latter and MF-HF transmitters for modulated CW telegraph
figure also gives the installation dimensions and operation, as described iri detail in Volume 1 of this
weights. handbook.
50 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Seelion IV
AN 08-10-195 P",agraph 4-6
RESTRICTED 51
Seelion IV RESTRICTED
Paragraph ;) AN 08-10-195
When switch S-415 is turned to the MVC position, receiver whenever the latter is in either the Ave or the
ground is removed from terminal 7 of receptacle J-412 MVC position. It also opens the battery circuit when
to disable the squelch circuit of the VHF receiver and the latter is in the OFF position.
prevent AVe action on weak signals. This switch also
removes the short circuit from R-412A, allowing the Receptacle J-417 and its associated· wiring, carries
I
position of the volume control knob to determine the side-tone from the modulator or unit so that full
gain of the receiver and consequently the volume of volume of side-tone will reach the headset circuit
the output. Switch S-415, in its MVC position, con- regardless of the setting of the attenuator (volume
nects directly across the receiver output. control) in the AVe condition.
Switch S-416 is connected mechanically with switch Capacitor C-410 serves to prevent oscillations
S-415. It completes the battery circuit to the VHF through feedback into the MVC lead.
I-I06-A
52 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph I
SECTION V-MAINTENANCE
1. TEST EQUIPMENT 36. It is essential that this equipment be available
\vherever it is necessary to t.une the VHF components
A. GENERAL.
to new frequency channels. This equipme:lt is also
Three groups of testing equipment are used in con-
useful for rough field checks of the operation of the·
nection with the adjustment) testing and repair of the
VHF components and in connection \\"ith such minor
VHF components of Model AN/ ARC-S Aircraft Radio
repairs as tube replacement.
Equipment. As noted in subsequent paragraphs, some \
of the test units are also useful in connection with (1) Antenna A-85-A.
the LF-1\1F-HF components. The three groups are: This artificial antenna, shown in Figure 37, provides
Test EquijJment I E-35-A. This provides appara- a load of approximately SO ohrns at 12 watts when
tus and tools which are used in the tuning and field attached to the antenna jack of the VHF t.ransmitter.
maintenance of the VHF transmitter and receiver. It also provides 2< convenient visual aid in tuning,
Test Equipment AN/GRM-l. This provides facili- since, when the transmitter is properly timed, the
ties for making bench tpsts of all components (both lamps glow \vith moderate brilliancy. The three
LF-MF-HF and VHF) of ~lodel AN/ARC-S Aircraft lamps, all of which are connected in para l!eI , are
Radio Equipment. 28-volt, 0.17 ampere, airplane type. The lamp kit,
General Purpose Apparatus. This includes such \vhich provides six spares, is packed in a heavy card-
items as output meters, tube analyzers, signal gen- board container.
erators, etc., which are used in the general mainten- (2) Indicator I-I06-A.
ance of all radio equipment.
Indicator I-106-A, illustrated in Figures 38 and 39,
B. TEST EQUIPMENT IE-3S-A. is a device' for checking the radiation from a VHF
Photographs.. Figs. 36, 37, 38, 40 and 42 antenna, energized by a transmitter operating in the
Schematic Circuits ..... Figs. 39 and 41 frequency band of 100 to 156 megacycles. Essen-
\Viring Diagram. . . Fig. 78
tially, it comprises a telescopic antenna coupled to a
Test Equipment IE-35-A comprIses the following parallel-tuned circuit which, in turn, is connected to a
units: silicon-crystal rectifier and a d-c microammeter.
Chest (,H-1.l0-A The scale of the variable air capacitor which reson-
Antenna A-gS-A ates the tuned circuit is calibrated to rqad directly in
Lamp Kit (spare lamps for' antenna) megacycles. Hence the indicator may be used as a
Indicator I-106-A frequency meter. After a VHF transm),tter has been
Test Unil 1-155-A tuned, the indicator may be placed 10 to 20 feet away
R-F Noise GeJlerator from the transrni1fil1g antenna, and the dial of the
Tool Kit indicator turned until a peak deflection is obtained on
Three Copies of Instruction Pamphlet the microammet.er. The dial reading of the indicator
Two views of the tL'st equipment are shown in Figure will approximate the carrier frequency_
RESTRICTED 53
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph AN 08-10-195
54 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 011-10-195 Paragraph 1
Since both the crystal and the microammeter are wrench for this transmitter will be found in the pocket
sensitive, care should be takell not to expose the instn!~ under the snapslide in one end of 1,lnit I-IS5-A.)
ment to strong T~f fields. lVloreover, the antenna (4) R-F Noise Generator.
should never be extended farther than is necessary to
obtain the required sensitivity of measurement. A The r-f noise genera. tor supplied with Test Equip-
spare crystal unit is carried in a dip inside the ment IE-3S~A is illustrated in Figure 36. It is some~
indicator. times useful (in localities where electrical disturb-
ances are at a very low level) as a source of noise when
adjusting or tuning a VHF receiver. It: comprises a
(620
small adjustable buzzer, mounted in a tubular flash-
STEEL
HOUSING
light case which contains a two~cell battery. The unit
~-l /// is shipped without battery cells.
M620
V (5) Tool Kit.
I
I The tool kit, illustrated in Figure 42, comprises a
I canvas roll and two f'ach of the following tools:
I
I Screwdriver for No.1 Phillips head screws
I Tuning wrench for VHF transmitter
~.J Tube extractor for receiver~type tubes
Wrench for hexagonal socket.-head No.6 cap
Figure 39-!ndicafor J-J06-A-Schematic Circuit screws
Wrench for hexagonal socket-head No.8 cap
The handling, inspection and use of a cartridge type screws
silicon crystal rectifier unit require particular care in Wrench for hexagonal socket-head No.6 set
order to avoid damage. In many cases the body of the screws
person handling the crystal unit is not at ground \"lrench for Bristo No.6 four-spline set screws
potential owing to his movement across an insulated (6) Instruction Pamphlet.
floor or deck. The static charge carried by t he body
may then be discharged through the unit, if it is held Three copies of an instruction pamphlet are con-
by the base and the tip is brought into contact with tained in a pocket on the cover of the chest. This
grounded equipment. The same thing may occur if pamphlet contains instructions for tuning the VHF
the tip of the unit is at ground potent.ial and its base is transmitter and receiver of Model AN I ARC-5 Air-
touched by a person or object carrying a static charge. craft Radio Equipment. in some cases it will be found
Likewise, if the unit is handed from one person to that the .pamphlet is written in terms of U. S. Army
another, a discharge may take place. code numbers and designations; the instructions for
tuning Radio Receiver BC-942-A (Army code) and
To avoid damage, therefore, always hold the crystal Radio Transmitter BC-9S0-A (Army code) apply
unit by its base. Ground the base to the equipment equally to the corresponding VHF units of ANI ARC-S.
momentarily before attempting any further handling In case of any doubt, refer to Section I I of this voiulne.
of it. Before handing the unit to anot.her person,
first touch his bare hand or face, in order to equalize C. TEST EQUIPMENT AN/GRi\J-l.
any static charge. Photographs... . . ......... Figs. 43, 46 and 49
Instruction Diagram. . . Fig. 66
Exposure of a unit to a strong electromagnetic field Schematic Circuits.. . .. Figs. 47 and 48
may damage or destroy it. Do not remove a crystal Wiring Diagrams.. . .... Figs. 78, 79 and 80
unit from its holder., or from the spare crystal com- Cord Assemblies... . ...... Fig. 67
partment, when in the vicinity of a source of strong Test Equipment AN/GRM-l is intended for use at
electromagnetic fields. When a crystal unit is not in a maintenance center. It is used for making bench
use, always keep it wrapped in metal foil or in a closed tests of all the components of Model AN I ARC-S
metal box or compartment. Aircraft. Radio Equipment. (Receiver Test Set No.
(3) Test Unit 1-I5S-A. 7918 and Transmitter Test Set No. 9558, which are
Test Unit I-ISS-A is illustrated in Figures 40, 41, described in Volume 1, are for the LF-MF-HF units
and 78. It includes a 0-100 scale d-c meter (1.0 only.)
milliampere for full scale deflection), together with a Although most routine tests and many repairs can be
seven-position rotary switch, six resistors, and a cord made with the AN/GRM-l equipment, major over-
and plug for attachment to test receptacle J-307 on the hauls, realignment work, sensitivity and selectivity
front of Radio Transmitter T-231 ARC-S. (A tuninR checks, etc., require additional test apparatus. The
RESTRICTED 55
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph AN 08-10-195
' .....·P-630
1
POCKET fOR VHF
TRANSMITTER TUNING WRENCH
630
56 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08·10·195 Paragraph 1
.\I /1
/ t··\b,.·
I A i/ ' "
"-'
j'
...... .
,~~
.'
RESTRICTED 57
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph AN 08-10-195
series with a thermocouple ammeter having a range of (5) Control Units C-30/ARC-5 and C-43/ARC-5.
o to 0.5 ampere. It is connected to the output of the These uni ts are used to con trol the transmi tters and
transmitter by means of a five-foot coaxial cord receivers which are under test. They. are described in
(CD-745). A properly adjusted and tuned Radio Section IV of this volume.
Transmitter T-23/ARC-5 should put approximately
325 milliamperes into this antenna. (6) Control Unit MC-237.
(3) Antenna 1'S-79;' U (A-69-A). This is a local tuning crank for use in connection
This unit comprises a SO-ohm non-inductive re- with the testing; of LF-MF-HF receivers.
sistor mounted in an insuhned housing. A coaxial
plug and t\\"O soldering terminals are provid(>d. It is (7) Cords CD-525, CD-527, CD-528, CD-53i,
used to connect 1he antenna jack of a VHF receiver to CD-53], CX-31/GRM-l andCX-32/GRM-i.
a signal generator. The construction of this antenna These c.ords are identical, except for length, with
is shown in Figure 44. This unit was formerly coded certai·11 cable assemblies which are used in connection
Antenna A-69-/\. with the LF-,\IF-HF equipment described in Volume
1. Tht'., cable assemblies, as described and shown in
•• v ' - " ' - TERMINAL
the drawings therein, are of lengths as specified for
each installation. The nominal length is shown in the
dra\vings as "L.... p The corresponding cords used in
Test Equipmel>t AN.'GR!\I-l are all five feet long.
The correspondence lwt\veen test equipment cords
and Ll"-l\1 F-Hl" cable assemblies is:
58 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 1
(8) Cords CD-706, CD-745, CD-905 shown in Figure 46, schematic circuit in Figure 47 and
CX-33/GRM-l and CX-34/GRM-l. wiring diagram in Figure 79. The connections used
The-se cords, and their construction, are shown In
in testing: receivers are shown in Figure 66.
Figure 67, J n the case of VHF receivers, the test unit permits
(9) lvIodulator and Dynamotor. the lester tn select the channeL (Provision is made
for the sel{'ction of as many as 8 channels, although
The modulator and dynamotor used -in Test Equip-
Radio Receiver R-28/ARC-S utilizes only four. This
ment AN/GRIVI-l are described in Volume 1.
is done in order to anticipate possible future- designs
(10) MountinR Bases, Plales and Racks. incorporating 1110re than four channels.
The mounting bases, mounting plates and mounting The CONTROL SWITCH has two functions: (a) \Vhen
racks are described in Volume 1. all. LF-~-1F-HF receiver is under test, it determines
(11) Shunting Unit. vl/hether the receiver shall he in the CW ('r lVICW
The i-f shunting unit supplied as a part of Test condition. (b) \Vhen a \if-IF n~ceiver is under· test, it
Equipment ANjGRIVI-l is provided for use when sets the receiver for -eitht~r :\.-lVe or AVe operation.
aligning the intermediate frequency stages of the VHF The INCREASE OUTPUT control operates in the same
receiver. A IS00-ohm resistor ;10d 0.006 mf capaci10r manner as the correspoilding control in Radio Control
arc connf'cted in series and enclosed in an insulated Unit C-43/ ARC-5; it: determines the sensitivity or
housing. insulated clips are soldered io the terminals power output of the receiver under test.
of the shunting unit. This unit is 5hO\·\/n in Figure 45.
The METER switch, in its various positions, connects
(12) Test Unit I-104-A. shunts and multipliers to the meter and also connects
Test Unit I-l04-A is used in the servicing of both the meter to different parts of the receiver circuit. 1"he
LF-?\·lF-HF and VHF receivers. Its cOllstruction is meter n~adings which should normally be obtained
4---CROCODILE
\- CLIP
----
i:z=';
'\~ !--INSULATOR
II
/ V
'U
II
II
0.006 }If
~~::s;::s;ts3~2-S-"
.
="S')·-~,,::o_o~n~_-~
.: ~~3lt--
__ ," COVER
ASSEMBLY
SHJLL
RESISTOR AND ____
I A
SECTION A-A
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY
RESTRICTED 59
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph AN 08-10-195
S-600A
SPARE
-602
R-600A
R-600B
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 1
56018
IW
o.osw
I 7
TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT OF RECfyrACLES () 10 0 0
8
AS VIEWED FROM OUTSIDE 2 20 0 0 5
o 30 04
when testing both LF-~IF-HF and VHF receivers are nat ure and amount of this auxiliary equipment depends
given in Table A of Figure 66. upon the nature of the work undertaken. The follow-
ing \vill suffice for most of the VHF majntenance work
(13) Test Unit I-I5S-A.
which is ordinarily carried out in the field:
Test Unit I-1S5-A is identical with the same unit
Volt-Ohmmeter R-F Signal Generator
as ~upplied with Test Equipment IE-35-A ahd de-
Output Meter I-F Signal Generator
scribed above in Paragraph lb. It is used in COIl-
Tube Checker A-F Oscillator
nection with' the servicing of VI-IF transmitters.
(14) Test Unit TS-58/GRM-I. - SCALE +
This test unit is used in connection with the testing
of both the !lIF-Hfo' and the VHF transmitters. The
I
S610A'I.·-,·~,~ . ... - - - - ,,~~- - - --- - ---~ 5610B
-v
-JV
~~12 IMEG
RESTRICTED 61
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph 1 AN 08-10-195
S-610A
$-610B
R-6!O
R-61
R-614
62 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 1-2
The conditions under which these various units are natively, it should be possible to read the frequency
required are outlined in the following paragraphs. within ± 5 kc at approximately 156 me.
(1) Volt-Ohmmeter. The General Radio signal generalors of the 804
Series are suitable for this purpose. If over-all
A volt~ohIl1meter is required to make the resistance
selectivity tests are to be made, it is advisable to
and d-c voltage measurements \vhich are used in
supplement the signal generator with a crystal con-
servicing both the VHF transmitter and the VHF
trolled frequency calibrator.
receiver. The voltmeter should have a resistance of
at least 1.000 ohms per volt, and preferably 20,000 (5) l-F SignalGenerator.
ohms per volt. It should have several ranges, includ-
In order to align and test the intermediate-frequency
ing one reading up to 750 or 1,000 volts. The ohmmeter
stages of the VHF receiver, it is necessary to have a
should measure, wi th reasonable precision, resistances
signal generator with the proper characteristics. The
as low as 1.0 ohm, and at least as high as one megohm.
signal generator must be capable of being set to
Weslon Test Analyzer Model 772, or Weston Volt-
6900 ± 5 kc (the mid-band of the i-f amplifier) or
Ohmmeter i'vlodel 564 Type 3-C, may be used. RCA
else, suitable calibrating e-quipment should be provided
VoltOhmyst, Jr. and Volt-Ohmmeter 1-107 (U. S.
to insure that the frequency or the generator is \\·ithin
Army code) are also suitable.
the limits mentioned. The stability of the generator
(2) Out put Power N£eter. should be such that frequency shifts greater than ±2
kc are not .encoun t.ered during a measuremen t. It
An output power meter is required to measure the
should be possible to read the dial to ±S kc over the
output of the VHF receiver. This meter should be
frequency range from 64.00 kc to 7400 kc if i-f bancl
capable of measuring pov·/er outputs up to 2 watts
width measurements are to be made.
into a resistance load of 300 ohms (or, 24.5 volts across
300 ohms). Preferably, the meter should be capable of The output of the signal generat.or should be con-
measuring outputs as low as 0.1 milliw"att, but this is tinuously variable from 1 microvolt to at least. 0.1 volt,
not absolutely necessary unless signal-to-noise ratios and preferably to 1.0 volt. The output should appear
are to be measured. across a low impedance (less than 100 ohms). The sig-
(3) Vacuum Tube Checker. nal generator should be capable of being modulated to
a depth of 30 per cent by a tone of 400 cps or 1000
A vacuum tube ch{'cker (anal")lzer) is useful in check- cps. If <tudio-frequency response measurements are
ing the condition of the tubes used in the VHF re- to be made with this generator, it should be possible
ceiver. Any of the standard checkers may be used for to modulate the output to a depth of 30 per cent at.
this purpose, although OIlP w'hich is capable of measur- frequencies varying from 90 to 6000 cps. lVleans
ing mutual conductance is preferable. should be provided to indicate that the modulation is
30 ± 2 per cen t.
(4) R -F Signal Generator.
The Hickok 19-X Signal Generator, used in con-
1n o!der to align the nuiio-frequency and harmonic
junction with the Ll\T Series Heterodyne Frequency
generator stages of the VHF receiver, it is necessary to
Meter will meet the above requirements.
have a standard signal generator v,chich can be tuned
from 100 megacycles to 156 megacycles. The output (6) A-F Oscillator.
must be continuously variable from 1 microvolt to O. J
If audio-frequency response tests arc.> to be md"cle on
volt, or preferably, to 1.0 volt. The output should
the VHF transmitter or the VHF receiver, it is neces-
appear across an impedance of 30 ohms or less.,
sary to have a variable-frequency audio oscillator.
It is desirable, but not absolutely necessary, that the This should be of sufficient power to modulate the
signal generator 1)(' capable of 30 ± 2 per cent modula- transmitting equipment a1 ;lpproxilllately 75 per C(,llt
tion at 400 cps or 1000 cps with nep:Iigible frequency or the standard signal gCllPrator to a depth of 30 per
modulation. If audio-frequency response character- cent over the frequency range from 90 to 6,000 cps.
istics are to be measured, it must be possible to The oscillator may he a Hewlett-Packard Type 200-13,
modulate the output of the generator at a depth of a General Radio Type 608-A, a Western Electric Type
30 ± 2 per cent \'.:ith modulating frequencies between 13-A, or an equivalent.
90 and 6000 cps. Means should also be provided to 2. PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
indicate that it is so modulated.
I t is recommended that, in so far as radio silence and
If an over-all selectivity test is to be made, it is security regulations iJcrmit, the following check of the
necessary that the signal generator be capable of being VHF equipment be made before each flight of the
set to 156 megacyc1es, ± 5 kilocycles. Or, alter- aircraft in \vhich.it is installed:
RESTRICTED 63
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph :2 AN 08-10-195
See that a suitable source of 28-volt power is available. both MVC and A vc. If no signals are heard, listen
If the engine generator or other primary power source to the background noise on M V C.
is not operating, connect to an external power supply,
Pay particular attention to dynamotor noise when tlu!
such as a battery cart or a putt-putt. Do not attempt
VIIF receiver is operated on AIVC and 1naximum sensi-
to carry out the check on the aircraft battery 'alone;
tivity. If there is any question regarding the receiver
this might result in low voltage and a discharged
dynamotor, replace it with one which is known to be
battery.
in good condition.
See that the VIIF transmitter and receiver are located
in the proper stalls and are secured by safety wiring. Check the cord and plug of each headset and micro-
Also check the safety wiring of the control units. phone for open and short circuits and for intermittent
troubles.
Check that each channel selection push button ojJerates
both the VIlF transmitter and llie V][F receiver to the If conditions jJennit, call the tower or another air-
/JrojJcr channel. The channel selection of the trans- craft and carryon a short two-way conversation on each
mitter can be checked by ohserving the letters At H, C VIi F channel. Pay particular attention to the side tone
and D which appear through the \vindow in the front and the quality of the modulation.
of the unit. In the case of the receiver, observe that
If radiation is permitted (-i.e.! radio silence not ~n
the frequency dial on 1 he front panel indicates the
force), but it is not feasible to lalk with the tower or
assigned frequency for c;lch channel.
another aircraft, check with an Indicator I-106-A, or
Listen on each VII F channel. If signals are heard, some other convenient radiation indicator, thdt the VII F
check the ojJeration of the INCREASE OUTPUT control with transmitter radiates on each of the four channels.
L-102--;'-
L-103--=::::
Vla7 L-IOB
RESTRiCTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 2-3
If conditions do not jJcrmit either of the hIS! two riors with a clean, dry cloth and remove the dust
checks to be carried out, renwve the antenna cable from covers from the transmitter and receiver. Clean the
the jack on the front of the VII F transmitter and insert interiors of the units and also (.lJI plugs, receptacles and
Antenna A-85-A (part of Test Equipment IE-35-A). jacks with an air hose. Use only air which is intended
Shout or whistle into the JnicrojJhone, and notice that for cleaning purposes and which is free from oil and
side tone is received; also, that the lamps of the artificial grit. Also, blow any condensed moisture from the air
antenna increase in brilliancy with modulation. line and gun before turning it on the equipment. Care
should be exercised not to blow hard enough to dis-
3. PERIODIC INSPECTION place or damage any wiring or apparatus.
b. VISUAL INSPECTION.
A systematic visual inspection and operating test
should be made on the VHF components at regular Examine all exposed wiring, cabling, plugs, recep-
intervals. This may be done at the time of the" 50- tacles, bonding straps, ground connections and
hour" inspection of the aircraft, at regular monthly antenna lead-ins for obvious damage or wear. I."ook
intervals, or at such other times as may be ordered by particularly for worn or frayed insulation which might
competent authority. In addition to the specific be caused by vibration and fubbing, or by insufficient
items listed below, a careful watch should be main- slack in cabling and wiring. Make sure that there is
tained for any abnormal condition or unusual oper- sufficient slack to avoid limiting the motion of the
ation. Remember: Many operating failures and units in their shock mountings.
serious troubles can be forestalled by careful and Inspect the wiring of the transmitter and receiver
intelligent routine inspections. for loose or broken connections. Look fOf broken or
The periodic inspection should include, as a mini- damaged parts and for evidences of overheating
mum, the items listed in the following paragraphs, (discolored or carbonized resistors, charred insulation,
melted wax, etc.). Remember that troubles can often
a. RE:vrOVAL AND CLEANING OF UNITS. be located by the sense of smelI; a transformer or coil
Remove all VHF units, including the control units, which has been overheated frequently causes a charac-
from their respective mountings. \Vipe the exte- teristic odor which persists for a long time.
RESTRICTED 65
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 3-4 AN 08-10-195
Tighten all screws and nut:-; which can be reached at any point of the airplane may cause high back-
\\,1(hoU1 disturbing \,\lirillg or apparatus. Examine odlcr ground noise. ,This high noise level requires that the
scrp\\'s and nuts for looseness; tighten where necessary. squelch h(" adjusted to a relatively insensitive con-
Inspect carefully for any other evidence of trouble dition, thus reducing the over-all sensitivity of the
or abnormal operation. receiver and the operating rang'e. The importance of
proper shieiding and bonding cannot be over-empha-
Replace any defective parts. sized.
Burnish the contacts of all relay springs and of all f. OPERATING CHECK.
relay-type switch springs. Check them for proper
folio\\' in both the operated and non-operated positions. Carry out a regular pre-flight check in accordance
with the procedure outlined in Paragraph 2 of this
c. BENCH TEST. section.
Replace the dust covers and place the VHF trans-
mitter~ receiver and control units in their appropriate 4. LUBRICA nON
positions on a test bench equipped with Test Equip- a. VHF TRANSMITTER.
ment AN!GR~1-1 (see Figure 66). Test the trans-
mit ter by making the measurements listed in Tables The VHF transmitter requires periodic lubrication
Band C of Figure 66. Test the receiver by 'making of the large gear which forms part of each turret
the first five measurements listed in Table A of the assembly and of the worm gear. on the end of the
same figure. Operate the equipment on 'all four chan- tuning motor shaft. These points should receive an
nels. Operate the receiver on both AVe and l\lve. application of grease (AN-G/3A. Beacon M-285,
Repair or replace any defective components. Royco 94, or equivalent) at approximately every
20.000 ope rat ions of the channel selection mechanism.
Check the tuning of the transmitter and the receiver The amount of lubricant applied should be just suffi-
by carrying out the procedure given in Section II. cient to cover the gear teeth in each case, Care should
d. RE-INSTALLATION AND ANTENNA be exercised to prevent any of the grease from getting
MATCHING. on contact springs or other contact· making parts.
Replace the VHF units in their proper positions in All moving parts of the transmitter, other than
the aircraft and reconnect all cords and cables, Be those mentioned above, are so lubricated at the time
sure that all plug-locking rings are ~and-tight. of manufacture that they should not require further
Replace alt safety wiring. lubrication during their normal service life.
f-O:
zw
0>
0:0
"-u
"0:
Ow
f->
f-O
Ou
"[
RESTRICTED 67
Seelion V RESTRICTED
Paragraph 5 AN 08-10-195
5. REPLACEMENT OF SELECTOR 0-101 IN insure the proper mesh of the selector gear with its
VHF RECEIVER mating gear on the tuning capacitor shaft. The free
It is recommended that, \vlwn trouble is experienced portion of the split gear on the .selector should be
with selector 0-101 (or O-IOIA), it be replaced with rotated approximately two teeth to provide proper
selector 0-102. The steps IH'cessary to <:10 this are tension in the anti-backlash spring.
gi ven below:
(12) Replace socket head screws M and check for
(1) Remove the top and side co\.rerso[ the receiver. proper mesh of gears. There should be visible play in
the mesh; this can be checked by rotating the solid
(2) Remove screws A and 13 (Figure 52) from the gear of tpe r-f tuning capacitor shaft while the selector
bottom and front of the hottom cover plate. This will is locked on one of its channel positions. If noticeable
allow the fr~nt end of the bottom plate to pivot ahout pia}' is absent, shims should be placed at M betwe~n
the rear of the receiver. th" selector and the r-f unit shield. If the gear mesh
is too loose (less than 50 per cent of tooth engagement),
(3) Remove screws (' (Figure 52) from the lower
then screws M should be loosened slightly and the top
part of the front cover <llld St'tT\VS j) flcar tht.' top of the
of the selector moved slightly to the left. as viewed
front cover, Remove the dial escutcheon pbte.
from the front, until proper gear mesh is obtained.
(4) Slide the front cover forward to cl(ar the an-
tenna jack. Remove the cover and cut tlv~ four wires, E, (13) Replace the antenna jack and cable and se-
connected to the contact springs of the 0-101 selector. cure with the tv.:o screws, H, at the side of the selector.
These wires should be cut as dose as possible to the
(14) Replace the front cover bracket and secure
spring terminals.
with screws F.
(5) Remove screws F (Figure 52) and the front
(15) Unlace seven-wire cable K;' reform and tape
cover bracket.
as shoVo/n in Figures 53 and 54. Solder wires to the
(6) Remove screws H (Figure 53) and the cable proper terminals as shown in the wiring diagrarrl of
clamp. Discard the clamp. Bend the antenna jack, Figure 70. The terminals of terminal strip E-2S0 are
cable and bracket upward to clear the selector. numbered consecutively from bottom (terminal 1) to
top (terminal 13).
(7) Cut the seven wires, K, as close as possible to
their terminating point (Figure 53) and swing the (16) Unlace four-wire cable E ancl remove the tape
cable up out of the way. nearest the cut end of the wires. Hold the fron t cover
in approximate position and form the cable along the
(8) Remove the No. 8 socket head screws L inside of the flange to terminating points on the termi-
(Figure 52) and M (Figure 53). Remove the old naL strip. Cut the wires to approximately the cor-
selector unit. rect length and relace or retape. Solder to the proper
terminals as shown in the wiring diagram of Figure 70.
(9) Remove screws N (Figure 52), releasing the
r-f shield between the selector unit and the r-f unit of (17) Replace the front cover mounting bracket
the receiver. Replace with the nevI' r-f shield which is and the antenna jack bracket. Leave the mounting
supplied with the neVo/ selector. screws for these slightly 100se.
(10) Hold the new selector in position and replace (18) Replace the front cover and secure the
the two socket head screws, L, at the bottom. Do 110t seven screws, 13 and C (Figure 52). Replace the
turn these screws up all the way; make finger-tight seven screws, A, which secure the bottom cover plate.
ollly. The gears should he so meshed that when the
two tuning capacitor gears are meshed at the Leeth (19) Replace dial escutcheon plate and four
markedul. . -L," the frequency illdicator dial is lined up screws D.
with its high-frequency mark (to the right of the 156
mc mark) in line with the index line. Also, when the (20) Replace and secure the top cover of the
tuning capacitor gears are meshed at the II H-lI" receiver.
marks, the frequency scale should be at its lowest
setting. (21) Tighten the screws which secure the front
cover bracket and the antenna jack bracket.
(11) Before the tV,TO socket head screws, 1\.11, at the
top of the selector are replaced, care must be taken to (22) Replace the side covers.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 5
TERMiNATION POINTS
7·W!RE CABLE, K
ANTENNA JACK
~BRACKET
•
~~
'~t "
CABLE CLAMP 4-WIRE OLD SELECTOR (0-10!)
(DISCARD) CABLE,E (DISCARD)
RESTRICTED
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph 5 AN 08-10-195
4-WIRE
CABLE, E
4-WIRE ______~:~-,
CABLE,E
E-250
70 RESTRICTED
I
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs' 6..:}'
6. REPLACEMENT OF TUNiNG INDUCTORS IN V·303, and then rotate the motor until the 'coil
VHF TRANSMITTER assembly is centered at the top. Remove the two
The design of the turrets of the VHF transmitter is clamping yokes. Remove the old assembly and
such that the tuning inductors can be replaced in case replace it with the new. Replace the clamping yokes
of damage. The recommended procedure for chang- and the tube.
ing these coils is outlined in the following paragraphs:
7. REPLACEMENT OF VHF TRANSMITTER TURRETS
a. FRONT TURRET COILS, L-311A, B, C, D.
To replace a coil in the front turret, first remove The following procedures are recommen.,ped for use
the power amplifier tube, V-304, and then turn the when a turret of the VHF transmitter is to be replaced.
motor in a counter-clockwise direction until the coil a. FRONT TURRET, Z-301.
is in the top position. When a front turret is to be replaced, remove all
Unsolder the ends of the coil from the terminals on vacuum tubes. Unsolder the connection between the
the rear end plate of the turret. Remove the clamping turret and the antenna relay (this requires a soldering
yoke which holds the coil form in place. Remove the copper with a long, thin tip). Unsolder the two 'wires
coil form by lifting it from the slotted rear turret which are connected to capacitors C-329A and
plate and at the same time withdrawing it from the C-329B on the motor. Unsolder tilt' wire which is
hole in the front turret plate. Care must be exercised brought up through the chassis and connects to
to avoid damage to the turret contact springs or the capacitor C-322 in the plate supply lead. Remove
antenna coupling capacitor. the screw which secures this capacitor to the chassis
See that the new coil form has a tuning slug in and the two screws which. secure the choke coil
place. Transfer the retaining ring from the old coil assembly, L-309, L-31O. Remove the three turret
form to the new one. Insert the new form in the mounting screws. Two of these are located below the
turret. Replace the clamping yoke. Be sure that the coil forms; the third is located at the extreme right
coil form is pushed forward as far as possible and that f ron t corner of the transmi tter chassis and passes
the clamping yoke rests in the notch of the coil form. through the motor base. '
Solder the ends of the winding in position. Remove the flexible shaft extending along the left-
hand side of the chassis by removing the cotter pin
Check for a minimum of ~ inch clearance between and sliding the collar toward the rear until free of the
the coupling loop and the \vinding of the coil form and shaft. Remove the turret with the choke coils and
for a minimum of ~6 inch clearance between the coup- capacitor attached, by slipping it toward the rear. Be
ling loop and adjacent loops. careful not to break the connections to the coil of
After a coil assembly has been replaced in the front antenna relay K-30L
turret it should be checked for coverage of its fre- Transfer the motor and the coil assemblies from the
quency band. If it fails to cover the band, the condi- old to the new turret. Be sure that each coil assembly
tion can usually be corrected by carefully changing is lined up with the proper channel indicator marking
the turn separation, i.e., by lengthening or shortening (A1 B, C or n) on the disc at the front of the new tur~
the coil. See Paragraph 1l·b(6) of this section. ret assembly. Also transfer the choke coils with their
b. CENTER TURRET COILS, L-302A, B, C, D attached resistor and capacitor.
and L-308A· B, C, D. To replace the turret reverse the procedure for
To replace a coil in the center turret, first remove removal. Before replacing the cotter pin in the flexihle
all tubes from the transmitter and then turn the motor shaft align the front and center turrets as explained
in a counter-clockwise direction until the coil is in the below. The original pin probably cannot he reused.
top position and is centered between the two terminal Replace it with a new pin, or if the identical replace-
strips. Remove the two clamping yokes which secure ment part is not available, with a !{6 inch x Yz inch
the coil form to the turret assembly. cotter pin. Form the pin (or cotter pin) so that it doe:;
not foul the chassis.
Remove the old coil form and replace it with the
new form. Replace the two clamping yokes. Replace The new front turret must be so aligned with the
the vacuum tubes. center and rear turrets that the proper coil assemblies
for each channel come into the circuit at the same
c. REAR TURRET COILS, L·303A, B, C, D, time. In the event that there is any question regarding
L·304A, B, C, D and L·30SA, B, C, D. the frequency range of a given coil assembly (i.e.,
To replace one of the coil assemblies of the rear whether it is for channel A, B, C or D) note the
turret, remove the second harmonic generator tube, drawing number which is stamped on the form and
RETSRICTED 71
Seelion V RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 7-8 AN 08-10-195
refer to the Table of Replaceable Parts in this volume. for channel, with the front and rear turrets. Recon-
This table shows, for each such drawing number, the nect the shafting, using temporary pinsin the couplings.
correspori,ding .frequency range and channel. When Check the mechanical alignment several times on
aligning the front turret, see that the tuning controls each channel, and change the temporary coupling pins
for each channel are accessible through the holes in as necessary until a satisfactory alignment is obtained.
the front panel of the transmitter. Replace the temporary pins with permanent pins,
Check the new front turret contact springs for making sure that there is no danger of fouling the
proper registration on each channel. There should be chassis. Reconnect and solder the white wires and
circuit continuity through the springs for ten com~ the choke coil to the crystal switch.
plete revolutions of the tuning motor before and after
ReplaGe tubes and crystal units.
the normal stopping point is reached. If the turret
does not stop properly for this adjustment, remove c. REAR TURRET, Z-303.
the cotter pin <lnd index the front turret without
When a rear turret is to "be replaced, first remove
rotating the cellter turret until proper alignment is
the harmonic·generator tubes, V-302 and V-303. Un-
obtained. Then reinsert the cotter pin through the
solder all external connections to the terminal strip on
six~position coupling by lining up the nearest hole in
the top of the turret. Disconnect the shaft connection
the flexible shaft. and remove all the three screws which secure the
Check the continuity and follow of all spring con- turret to the chassis. Remove the turret.
tacts which connect the various circuit elements in
Transfer the coil assemblies from the old to the new
the turret with the power amplifier, with the antenna
turret. Secure the new turret to the chassis and recon-
relay and \vith chassis ground.
nect the wires to the terminal strip. Place the turret
b. CENTER TURRET, Z-302, AND CRYSTAL in mechanical alignment with the front and center
SWITCH, 5-313. turrets, using the same general procedure described
Except in case of emergency, neither a center turret above. Install a permanent coupling pin, being sure
nor a crystal switch should ever be replaced separately. that it· will not foul the chassis.
These two units are carefully ,matched and adjusted 8. MAINTENANCE OF MOTORS
to each other in the factory, using tools and methods B-l01, B-250 AND 8-301
which are seldom available in the field. They should,
It is expected that the channel switching motors of
therefore. be treated as a single assembly; a failure
the VHF transmitter and receiver will require rela-
of either calls for the replacement of both.
tively little maintenance during the service liJe of the
To replace a center turret and crystal switch, first equipment.
remove all tubes and crystals from the transmitter, The bearings are lubricated at the factory with a
and then unsolder all external connections to the two grease which meets the standard specification, AN-G3,
terminal strips on the top of the turret. Unsolder the for low temperature operation. It is not expected that
connection to plate circuit choke coils L-306 and L-307. further lubrication will be required during the life of
Unsolder the four white wires connecting the crystal the motor. Armature end-play is limited by steel
switch to the crystal socket. Unsolder the white spacing washers or by a spring washer which does not
wire between the switch and the grid terminal of the require adjustment.
oscillator tube socket. Also unsolder the connection
Brush replacement is seldom required, and should
of choke coil L~313. Do not, at this time, remove
be avoided when possible. Experience shows that by
the five color>-coded wires from the cable form to the
the time the brushes are worn down to their minimum
s\vitch; these have sufficient slack so that they can be
length (Ys inch) the commutator is usually worn out
disconnected more conveniently after the turret has
and the bearings are contaminated .by carbon dust.
ut'en lifted from the chassis. Under these conditions the recommended practice is
Disconnect the shaft coupling on each side of the to replace the motor, since any attempt at salvage
center turret. Remove the three screws which secure will probably cost more than the value of the motor.
the turret to the chassis and lift the turret and crystal However, if unusual conditions make it necessary to
far enough to give aCcess to the five c.olor-coded men- replace brushes, it is essential that they be run in for
tioned in the last paragraph. Unsolder these five wires. a considerable period before the motor is placed in
Transfer the coil assemblies from the old to the new service in a transmitter or a receiver. The run-in
chassis. Reconnect and solder the five color-coded period will vary from one to twenty-four hours, de-
wires to the new crystal switch. Replace and secure pending upon conditions and upon the amount of
the new turret and switch assembly. Turn the new motor brush noise which can be tolerated in the head-
turret rotor until it is aligned mechanically, channel sets of the radio equipment. This run should be under
72 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 8-10
no load or a very light load. Under no circumstances dynamotors of this equipment. The former' has a volt-
should the selecting mechanism of the transmitter or age, close to 600 volts, which can readily cause serious
receiver be connected to the motor during this run, injury Or death. The receiver high voitagf', about 300
If brushes are removed for examination and are volts, is also dange-rous, and under some conditions
then replaced, care must be exercised to replace them may be fatal. Attention is called to the safety notice
in their original positions. This is facilitated by the in the fron t of this volume.
fact that the brushes are marked with + and In hunting trouble, the service man should make it
symbols for identification purposes. a rule to look for the simple things first. He should
Brush pressure is satisfactory if, with the cap re- remember that the most common causes of failure are
moved from the brush holder and the brush resting improper tuning or adjustment, dirty contacts, high~
against the commutator, the end of the brush spring resistance or "rosin-soldered" connections, ,wiring'
extends at least ¥t, inch beyond the brush holder. If crosses and short circuits, and defective vacuum tubes.
this is not the case, the spring should be stretched The possibility of intermittent troubles should not
slightly. be overlooked. Such conditions can often be brought
to light by shaking or jarring the equipment \vhile
9. MAINTENANCE OF RELAYS making operating checks or voltage and resistance
measure men ts.
All relays afe adjusted at the time of manufacture
and should require very little attention aside from an H a fuse blows, or if sparks or smoke is seen, power
occasional burnishing of the contacts. This may be should be removed from the unit affected; it should
done with the contact burnishing tool furnished with not be re-connected until an effort has been made to
Test Equipment AN/GRM-1. If contacts are badly locate and clear- the source of trouble. In this connec-
pitted, they may be smoothed with a very fine file tion, visual evidence of overheating, such as charred
and then thoroughly burnished. Care should be exer- or carbonized resistors and wiring, melted wax or filling
cised to prevent any metallic filings from falling into compound, etc., is frequently of help. Also, it should
the apparatus. Abrasive paper or cloth should never be remembered that a transformer or choke coil which
be used on relay contacts; their use is very likely to has been overheated often retains a characteristic odor
lead to premature burning and pitting, with resultant for a long time.
service failure. No lubricant of any kind should ever In the following instructions, certain values of volt~
be used on relays. age and resistance are specified as typical. Because of
Relay contacts should have adequate separation in ordinary variations in tube characteristics, resistor
their"open" position and substantial follow (to insure and capacitor values, aging of components, etc., these
contact pressure under vibration) in their "closed" values must be taken as merely approximations. They
position. When this is not the case, the relay spring indicate the general range of voltage and resistance
adjusting tools supplied with Test Equipment which may be expected under typical conditions. As
AN/GRM-l may be used to give the springs the long as the measurements of a particular unit do not
proper set. However, this operation is difficult and vary widely from the values given, disCl'eti6n must be
should not be undertaken, except in an emergency, by used before assuming that replacement is necessary.
an inexperienced person. Ordinarily. the existence of trouble is brought to the
Relay springs, coils or armatures should not be re~ attention of the service personnel in one of three ways:
placed in the field. In case of damage, other than that (1) the pilot or operator reports difficulty in operation;
which can be remedied by contact burnishing or (2) trouble is encountered in the pre-flight check (see
spring adjustment, the entire relay should be replaced. Section v, Paragraph 2); (3) some unusual or irregular
coridition is disclosed by the periodic inspection (see
Section V, Paragraph 3). Regardless of which of these
10. GENERAL SERVICING PROCEDURE FOR
VHF COMPONENTS is the source of the trouble report, an effort should be
made to 'obtain all pertinent information for a clue to
Except in an emergency, the servlcmg procedures the source of the trouble. Complete and intelligent
given in this section should be undertaken only 'by trouble reports greatly assist in repair and readjust~
qualified personnel provided with adequate testing ment.
equipment and tools. An inexperienced man, working Ordinarily, the first step in servicing an equipment
without proper facilities, can easily cause misalign~ reported faulty is to determine the general location of
ment or damage which requires extensive repairs. the trouble, i.e., whether the difficulty lies in the trans-
I t should be remembered at all times that dangerous mitter, the receiver, the control units, the mountings,
voltages are generated by the transmitter and receiver the wiring, etc. This is most readily done by a process
RESTRICTED 73
Section V RESTRICTED
of substitution and comparison. For example, if the As can be seen from Figure 66, the VHF receiver
VHF receiver is inoperative, but other receivers in the may be connected to the test equipment in either one
same rack are satisfactory, the VHF unit should be of two ways: by placing. it in the receiver rack; by
placed in a stall which normally holds a LF-MF-HF connecting it to Test Unit l-104-A through cord
receiver. If the control unit which controls this stall CD-527 and cord CD-706 with its attached adapter.
is then turned to the cw position, the VHF receiver In the former case, the receiver is operate? in its
should operate. If it does, then the trouble is probably normal position; in the latter, it may be turned on its
in the VHF control unit or the wiring to the VHF stall. side or back and the covers removed to give access to
If it does not, the trouble is in the VHF receiver itself. the apparatus within the receiver.
Or, if a VHF receiver known to be in good condition is (2) A VC O/mation.
available, it may be substituted for the one in question,
and all attempt made to operate it. Similar methods Operate the controls to the Ave position. The d-c
of substitution and comparison will readily suggest supply should be adjusted to 28 volts, as indicated by
themselves for the other VHF components. a meter reading of 56 scale divisions when the meter
switch of Test Unit 1-I04-A is in position 1. After
After the faulty component has been discovered, approximately 20 seconds the' input current, as
further servicing should be carried out with one or measured with the meter switch in position 2, should
more of the following procedures, depending upon the be 17 to 25 scale divisions (1. 7 to 2.5 amperes). Plate
nature of the fault and the testing facilities available: voltage, switch position 3, should be 48 to 52 divisions
a--A bench test using Test Equipment (240 to 260 volts). With the switch in position 5, to
AN/GRM-I measure cathode current to the r-f amplifier and the
first i-f amplifier, plus the current through the bleeder
h-~Voltage and resistance measurements
resistor of the gain control line, the meter deHection
c~'-" Alignment and sensitivity checks should be between 40 and lOa divisions (10 to 25
Details of these procedures are given in subsequent milliamperes) .
paragraphs of this section. (3) MVC Operation.
After the trouble has been cleared and the unit Turn the volume control on the test unit to the
reinstalled in the aircraft, the pre-flight check out- limit of its clockwise rotation for maximum volume.
lined in Paragraph 2 of this s~on should be made. Turn the control switch to the Mve position. The read-
ings set forth above should not change appreciably.
11. BENCH TESTS WITH TEST EQUIPMENT AN/GRM-l TUl~ning the volume control counter-clockwise should
Test Equipment AN/GRM-l simulates a complete result in a decrease of cathode current approaching a
installation of Model AN /ARC-5 Aircraft Radio reading of 4 scale divisions (1 milliampere) as a
Equipmen t and call, therefore, be used to make an minimum.
operating test on any component which is suspected (4) Noise.
of being faulty. At the same time, it affords means Listening tests should be conducted on each of the
for measuring certain critical voltages and currents four channels in both the AVC and the MVC condi-
in the transmitters and receivers. The values of these tions. If one channel shows appreciably more or less
voltages and currents, under normal conditions, are noise than the others, the tuping adjustment on the
given in the tables on the instruction diagram for the front of the receiver should be varied. If this does
test equipment, Figure 66. F'urther details for testing not result in un'ifonn performance, check for a defec-
the VHF receiver and transmitter are given in the tive crystal by replacing the regular crystal with olle
following paragraphs. from the set furnished with the test equipment.
It. VHF RECI':IVER. If excessive Iloise is heard on two or more channels,
(I) Preparation. it is likely that the dynamotor is at fault. To check
this, replace it with one known to be in good condition.
Before a VHF receiver is placed in position for a
bench test with Test Equipment AN/GRM-I, its (5) Rough Operating Check.
vacuum tubes should be checked; or, if no tube A rough check of the operation of tIle VHF receiver
checker or analyzer is available, it should be provided can be made by operating a transmitter on the fre-
with a set of tubes which are known to be in good quency to which the receiver is tuned while the receiver
condition. Tests should be made with both the is connected to Test Unit I-I04-A and is disconnected
regular dynamotor of the receiver and the test equip- from the normal sidetone circuit. The receiver should
ment dynamotor (or any other Dynamotor *DY -2/ pick up a signal from the transmitter. Since the r-f
ARR-2 which is known to be in good condition), input to the receiver under this condition is very high,
74 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 11
this merely gives a rough check of the fUllctioning of current should be within the limits given in the tahle
the receiver; it does not necessarily indicate adequate of Figun:~66. The r-f CutTent into the artificial an-
sensitivity. tenna, A-68-A, should be approximately 325 milli-
amperes on all channels. All measurements should be
b. VHF TRANSMITTER. taken with the transmitter operating in the VOICE
condition. Grid currents, r-f amplifier cathode cur·
CAUTION rents, supply voltage and plate voltage should all be
WI-lEN PUSH BUTTON A, B, C, D, 2 OR within the limits set forth in the table of Figure 66,
3 OF CONTROL UNIT C-30/ARC-S IS when measured with Test Unit I-ISS-A.
OPERATED, DANGEROUS VOLTAGES 'VIndulation can be checked by whistling or speaking
'VlAY EXIST IN THE MODULATOR into the microphone. The deflection of the meter on
UNIT AND IN THE TRANSMITTER. the artificial antenna should increase during moclu·
lation.
EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXER-
CISED TO AVOID CONTACT WITH (3) Channel Selection.
THESE VOLTAGES. NEVER TOUCH The channel selection mechanism should operate
ANYTHING IN THE MODULATOR smoothly and with normal speed. If this is not the
UNIT OR THE TRANSMITTER WHEN case, the fault may be due to a defective motor or to
THE TRANSMITTING DYNAMOTOR worn or improperly aligned gears. Replace the motor
IS RUNNING. REMEMBER THAT or the turret which is at fault.
EVEN IF THE MICROPHONE BUTTON If the motor fails to start, check the voltage appear-
OR THE KEY IS NOT OPERATED, ing on the terminals at the base of the motor. Voltage
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE STILL from the yellow lead (field) to chassis ground should
ON THE CIRCUIT IF THE EMISSION be the same as the d-c supply voltage (normally 27
volts). The black lead (armature) should be at ground
SELECTOR SWITCH IS IN THE TONE
potential when K-304 is in the non-operate position
OR cw PGSITION. and should be 27 volts above ground when K-304 is
(l) Preparation. operated. If the above voltages do not appear, the
fault is probably due to improper operation of relay
A VHF transmitter can be connected to Test Equip- K-304. If the voltages at the terminals are normal
ment AN/GRIVI-l by inserting it in position 1 of the but the motor still fails to function, the brushes may
mounting rack or by connecting it to Test Unit be stuck in their holders, or worn out. If replacement
TS-S8 'GRM-l by means of Cord CX-33/GRM-l with of the brushes does not correct the difficulty, the
its attached adapter. In the latter case, the trans- complete motor should be replaced.
mitter can be turned on its side or bL1Ck and the covers
removed to give access to the apparatus and wiring. I In some cases it may be found that the channel
In either case, the transmitter is also connected to the selection motor does not stop promptly at the end of
control unit, to Test Unit I-155-Aand Antenna A-68-A, a channel selection, but coasts so far that the circuit
as indicat.ed in Figure 66. is re-energized through switch 5-313. The selecting
mechanism then goes through another revolution, or
Normally, the transmitter should be tested with its
even through several revolutions before coming to a
own tubes. However. if there is any reason to believe
stop. This is usually caused by the failure of the nor-
that one or more of these is defectivt', tests may be
mally closed con tacts on relay K-304. (See Paragraph
made with tubes which are known to be satisfactory,
9 of this section for methods of burnishing relay COI1'-
and the results tabulated. Then the original tubes
tacts.) These cOIltacts, when fUilctiolling properly.
may be replaced and any difference in performance
short circuit the motor armature at the completion of
Doter\. In this \vay, \vorn-out or defective tubes may
a selection: this short circuit serves as a dynamic brake
be culled out even though no tube checker for the
and brings the mo~or to a comparatively quick stop.
transmitter tubes is available.
(2) l'oltrlge, Current and Outlmt Power Checks. (4) Operation of Relays.
The supply voltage should be adjusted to approxi- Invert the t.ransmitter and observe the action of
mately 27 volts, as indicated by a reading of S4 scale relays K-302, K-303, K-304, K-30S and K-306, When
divisions on the meter of Test. Unit TS-58/GRM-l supply voltage is applied and the motor is at rest,
when the meter switch is in posi,tion 1. Screen voltage, K-302, K-303, K-30S and K-306 should be operated;
plate voltage, screell current and r-f amplifier plate K-304 should be non-operated. During channel
RESTRICTED 75
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 11-12 AN 08-10-195
~witchiJlg \\'hilf' the motor is rUI1Jllng, K-304 should If difficulty is experienced in obtaining complete
be operated and the others non-operated. vVhen the coverage of any band, two adjustments are available.
channel has been sekcted K-304 should release, the Capacitor C-335 (the two small metal strips connected
remaining relays should operalt., aJ.1,d the motor should across the tuned output circuit of the second harmonic
stop. ,generator) can be varied by bending carefully with a
pair of pliers. The inductance of the coils in the tuned
(5) Trouble Indications on Meiers. plate circuit of the power amplifier (L-311A, B, C, D)
'The measurements taken with Test Unit I-1S5-A, can be changed" by increasing or decreasing their
when compared with the normal readings given in the length, thereby changing the average separation
table of Figure 66, frequently disclose trouble con- betwe,en turns and the inductance. To do this, un-
ditions which might otherwise be difficult to trace. A solder one end of the coil from its support on the rear
low (or zero) reading in position 1 may be due to (a) plate of the turret, stretch or compress the coil, and
failure of the crystal unit, (b) faulty operation of the re-solder to the support.
crystal selector switch, (c) lack of plate or screen
voltage on the oscillator tube, V-301, (d) a defective
12_ D-C VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
tube, V-301.
A low or zero reading on position 2, 3, 4, or 5 may A systematic measurement of the positive d-c
be due to a defective vacuum tube, failure of the spring voltages existing between the chassis and various
clips to contact the coil studs or improper tuning of terminals in the receiver and transmitter will fre-
the preceding stage. If the tube is known to be good quently facilitate the location of trouble in VHF
and the voltages on the tube are found normal but equipment. The terminals include those of all
the circuit still fails to tune properly, the fault may be vacuum tube sockets, an,d also those on terminal
due to the coil itself in which case the coil assembly strips in the unit involved. Recommended pro-
should be replaced. cedures for these measurements are given in the
following par~graphs.
A zero reading on position 7 indicates an open fuse
(R-324 or R-326) or a failure of relay K-302 or K-30S. a. VHF RECEIVER.
A low reading on position 7 indicates either a faulty
dynamotor or excessive plate or screen current drain. Voltage measurements on the VHF receiver should
be made with the dynamotor and all vacuum tubes in
Check the plate and screen current on positions 4 and
place. The controls should be in the MVC position
5 of Test Unit TS-58!GRM-1.
and the volume control knob should be turned to it!3
If the readings observed on Test Units TS-58/GRM-l full clock\vise position (maximum volume). All
and 1-15S-A are normal but little or no antenna cur~ voltages are to be measured from the terminal involved
rent is indicated on Antenna A-68-A, retune L-312, to chassis ground. The voltmeter should have a re-
check the antenna relay (K-301) for continuity and sistance of at least 1,000 ohms per volt (full scale
the antenna coupling circuit (L-312 and C-3Z3) for deflection). The voltages shown at each tube socket
good contact with the springs. Also inspect the two in Figure 81 are those which are obtained when the
springs S-314 and S-315 and be sure that they effec- receiver is tuned to a crystal controlled channel. ·The
tively short-circuit the inactive coils. values which are obtained when the receiver is not
(6) Band Coverage. tuned to a channel are listed in the table of note 5 in
the same figure. Measurements within ±20 per cent
After a transmitter tube or an r~f tuning coil has
of those indicated should be considered satisfactory.
been replaced, it is advisable to check the r-f tuned
An occasional deviation even greater than this does
circuits for complete coverage of their respective
not necessarily indicate trouble unless it is accom-
bands. To check the A channel circuits for such
panied by other irregular conditions.
coverage, insert the DC-30 Crystal Unit for 100 mega~
cycles in the A channel crystal' socket and tune the It will be found that some of the terminals of socket
transmitter. Use Indicator 1-106-A to verify that the X-WI (tube V-WI) are not readily accessible. How-
carrier is at correct frequency. See that normal ever, they can be reached, with a little practice, if a
indications are obtained on the test units and artificial long insulated probe is used. Terminals 1 and 2 are
antenna of Test Equipment AN/GRM-1. Replace strapped together, so a check that either is connected
the 100 megacycle crystal \vith the 123 megacycle to groun<l is ordinarily sufficient. Likewise, terminals
unit and tune to this carrier frequency. To check 3 and 5 are connected together through the cathode of
channel Band C circuits for coverage, use the 123 the tube; if it is known that the tube is good, anel that
and 146 megacycle crystal units. For channel 0, use the socket terminals are clean) a check of either 3 or S
the 132 and 156 megacycle crystals. is sufficien t.
76 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Sedion V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 12-14
RESTRICTED 77
Seelion V RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 14-15 AN 08-10-195
Test point A is used to measure the amount of drive amplifier circuits of Radio Receiver R-28/ ARC-S as
(at the fourth harmonic of the crystal frequency) on fo1\O\\ls: Couple the output of the signal generator to
the grid of the flrst harmonic generator tube) V-I09. coil L-l04 through a small condenser, S to 50 mmf.
Test point B affords a means of measuring the drive Couple the frequency standard, operated on its !OO kc
(at the twelfth h~rmonic of the crystal frequency) Oil standard frequency, to the same point through con-
the grid of the second harmonic generator tube, V-110. venient length of leads. \\lith varying outputs of 10
Test points C and D are both arranged to provide for to 1000 miCl-ovolts from the signal generatol" (un-
measurement of the grid drive on the mixer j-ube, modulated) tune the signal generator about its indi-
V-102. Since the resistance values associated with cated 6.9 mc frequency setting until a beat note !s
points C and D are different (180,000 and 10,000 heard in the output of the VHF receiver. Tune the
ohms in the case of C; 100,000 ohms and 10,000 ohms generator for zero beat and record the dial setting. At
in the case of D), their sensitivities differ. l::ither is the same time. check that varying the at1:enuator on
used, depending upon conditions, as explained later. the output of the signal generator from 10 to 1000
microvolts does not vary the beat note more than ap-
Test points E and F are connected across resistor
proximately ±S kc.
R-131, which constitutes part: of the load of the diode
detector (V-I05). Accordingly, measurements made If no frequency standard is available, a Radio Trans-
between these two points are an indication of the i-f mitter T-23/ ARCS can be used to calibrate the signal
voltage at the detector. generator. provided crystal units of proper frequency
l\leasurement's in connection with test points A, B) are available. The transmitter and the receiver should
C, D, E and F can all be made with meter ~1-600, be tuned to the same chan'nel and the signal generator
which is included in Test Unit 1-I04-A. When the coupler! to coil L-104 as described above. The signal
l\IETER SWITCH control of the test unit is turned to generator output is then heterodyned with the signal
posilion 6, the meter is connected directly to the two . picked up by the receiver and its frequency adjusted
binding posts marked TEST METER. Flexible leads for zero beat.
terminated in small insuhted test clips can be used to
connect t~ese binding posts to the test points. Since c. INTERMEDIATE-FREQUENCY CIRCUIT
the meter is of high sensitivity (50 microamperes, ALIGNMENT.
full-scale deflection) great care must be used to avoid
overloading and damaging it. It is recommended that) After the signal generator has been set to 6,900 ±
when not in use, the binding post be short-circuited 5 kc, as described above, the i-f circuit alignment of
in order to provide a damping load which minimizes the receiver can be carried out in the following steps:
the chance of daI11age from mechanical shocks.
(1) Remove the two side covers, the r-f shield
15. I-F ALIGNMENT AND MEASUREMENTS over tube V-10l, and the snap-on caps of the i-f filter
units.
a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRE]).:
The alignment and measurements of the inter- (2) Connect the receiver to Test Unit- 1-!04-A by
mediate-frequency circuits which are described in the means of Cord CD-706.
following paragraphs should not be undertaken with- (3) Connect the ungrounded side of the output of
out suitable testing equipment. This includes: Test the signal generator directly to the grid (terminal 4)
Equipment AN/GRl\II-l; an output power mE;ter; a of V-102. This may be most conveniently accom-
standard signal generator which can be set to 6,900±5 plished by clipping to coil L-104 on the tube side of
kilocycles; a crystal-controlled frequency standard or the r-f tuning· unit (Z-113).
calibrator. The last item is not required if the pre-
cision of the standard signal generator is such that (4) Connect theground s;cle of the output of the
the frequency limits of ±S kilocycles can be (kpended signal generator to the nearest accessible part of the
upon. It can also be dispensed with if a VHF trans- chassis.
mitter \vilh crystals of suitable frequency is avaiiable. (5) Connect the output power meter to one of the
In this event. the transmitter can be used as a fre- headset jacks of Test Unit 1-104-A. Set the input:
quency standard, although at a cost of some loss of impedance of the meter to 300 ohms.
con vemence.
b. CALIBRATION OF SIGNAL GENERATOR (6) Turn the INCREASE OUTPUT control on the test
FOR 6,900 ±S KC. unit to its maximum clockwise position.
The signal generator used for these tests can be cali- (7) Turn the CONTROL SWITCH of the test unit to
brated by using the i-f amplifier, detector and a-f the MVC position.
78 RESTRICTED
RESTRiCTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 15
(8) Modulate the oulput of the signal generator d. OVER-ALL SENSITIVITY OF 1-1'
30 per cent at 400 or 1000 cycles pel" second. AMPLIFIER.
(9) Adjust the output voltage of the signal gen- After the i-f circuit has heen aligned, its overall
/ eratqr until the output meter indicates approximately sensitivity can be measured with the following pro-
100 milliwatts. cedure. The receiver should be connected to the out-
put meter and to Test Unit I-104-A with controls at
(10) Align fdter Z-106 as follo\\'s: Connect the MVC and maximum volume output. ?vfeter M-600 of
i-f shunting unit (see Figure 45) from terminal 4 of the test unit should be connected to the binding posts
V-I05 to ground. Adjust the output voltage of the by the operation of the METER SWITCH to po~iti()n 6.
sig-nal generator to give approximately 10 milliwatts The 1/ +" binding post should be connected to test
as read on the output power meter. Adjust the trim- point E and the II - " binding post connected to tpst
mer screw marked lip," in the top of the i-f unit', t.o point F. The signal generator should be adjusted to
give peak pmver output as indicated on the output a frequency of 6,900 ±5 kc, modulated 30 per cent
power met.er, reducing the sig-nal generator at the same at 400 or 1,000 cycles per second.
time to maintain approximiJteJy 10 milliwatts output.
(1) Disconnect the grid (terminal 4) of the mixer
Connect the shunting unit from terminal 8 of V-104 to
tube (V-102) from its input circuit (Z-103) and COil-
ground and repeat 1.he above procedure while adjusting
the trimmer screw marked II G" in t.he top o[ the i-f nect it to ground through a small resistor of appro:'\i-
mately 0.5 megohm (value not critical).
unit for peak power output.
(2) Connect the output of the signal generator to
(11) AliRn filter Z-lOS in a similar manner. While terminal 4 of V-l02 and to chassis ground. Adjust
aligning the primary (screw P) connect the shunting the voltage of 1.he signal generator until the out put
unit [rom terminal 4- of V-I04 to ground. \Vhile align- meter reads 10 milliwatts (1.7 volts). The voltage of
ing the secondary (scr('\',' G) connect. it from terminC11 8 the signal generator, as indicated by its r-f voltmeter,
of V-103 to ground. should be between 10 and 20 microvolts.
(12) Align fdter Z-104 in a similar manner. While e. Stage-by-Stage Gain of ]-F AmjJlifier .
. aligning the, primary (screw P) connect the shunting
-- unit from terminal 4 of V-103 to ground. \Vhile align-
ing the secondary (screw G) connect it from terminal 8
In order to measure the stage-by-sta.ge gain of the
i-f amplifier, the receiver and testilf~ equipment
should be connected as described above in connection
of V-102 to ground.
\vith the measurement of the over-a!1 sensitivity. The
(13) Replace the snap-on covers of the i-f filter following steps should then be carried out.
units. (1) Connect the grounded output terminal of the
(-14) Replace other covers unless further test.s (see signal generator to the receiver chassis. Connect the
below) are to be made. ungrounded terminal through a capacitor of appro:'\i-
mately 0.001 mfd (value oot critical) to the Rrid or
the first i-f amplifier tube (terminal 4 of V-I(3). Vary
WARNING the output voltage of the signal generator until the
a-f output of the receiver, as measured by the output'
In no case should alignment of the i-f stages
meter, is 10 milliwatt's. The test meter of Test Unit
be made with a signal input great enough to I-104-A should read between 12 and 16 scale divisions
cause an a-f output 'from the receiver in ex- (6 to 8 microamperes). The r-f voltmeter of the signal
cess of 300 milliwatts or to cause a test meter generator should read between 600 and 1200 micro-
reading in e:'\cess of SO scale divisions (25 volts.
microamperes) when the meter is connected (2) Repeat the procedure just described, COli-
between test points I~ and F. Signals stronger necting the signal generator to the grid of the second
than this cause the delayed automatic gain i-f amplifier tube (terminal 4 of V-l04). The signal
generator r-f voltage required to produce a test meter
control circuit ,to fUllction, even though the
deHection of 12 to 16 divisions and an a-f output of
rf'ceiver is being operated in the 1.V1VC con- 10 milliwatts should be between 34,000 and 68,000
dition. If, for any reason, the alignment is microvol ts.
carried (Jut with the receiver in the AVe con- j. BAND WIDTH OF 1-1' AMPLIFIER.
dition, t.he t('st meter, connected as above, An over-all check of the performance of the i-f
must be kept below 15 scale divisions (7.5 amplifier can be obtained by measuring the band
microamperes). width, or the relative sensitivity at different frequencies
RESTRICTED 79
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 15-16 AN 08-10-195
close to the midband frequency (6,900 kc). To do this, (3) Vary the output r-f voltage of the signal gen-
proceed as follows: erator until the a-f output of the receiver, as measured
(1) Determine, as in para~(raph lSd of this by the output meter, is 10 milliwatts. The test meter
section, the signal voltage which, at 6,900 ±5 kc, del1ection should be between 12 and 16 scale divisions
modulated 30 per cent at 400 cps, will cause an a-f (6 to 8 microamperes).
output from the receiver.of 10 milliwatts. This is a c. AUDIO FREQUENCY POWER OUTPUT.
measure of the mid-band senstitivity. To measure the power output of the a-f amplifier
(2) Increase the signal voltage to twice the value stages, proceed as follows:
just determined. Tune the sign'a! generator to the (1) Connect the signal generator, test meter and
frequency below 6,900 kc which causes the a-f output output meter as in the preceding test.. Adjust. the
to again become 10 rnilliwatts. Do the same thing signal generator for an output of 6,900 ±S kc, modu-
above 6,900 kc. The difference between the 1\1/0 lated 30 per cent at 400 or 1,000 cycles per second.
frequencies so determined should be 140 ± 10 kc.
The sensitivity of the i-f amplifier is down 6 db at (2) Adjust the signal generator voltage to give a
these frequencies. reading of 100 scale divisions (50 microamperes) on
the test meter, The a-f output, measured by the out-
(3) Increase the signal voltage to 1,000 times the put meter. should be at least 450 milliwatts. This
value deter11lint'd in (1), above. Determine the fre- value should be obtained on both M\\C and AVe.
qllencies, above and below 6,900 kc, .at \vhich this
~i;::llal causes an a-f output of 10 m~!liwatts. 1'he differ- d. SQUELCH ADJUSTMENT RANGE.
ellce between these tv. 'O frequencies should be 400 ± To measure the range of adjustment of the squelch
SO kc. The sensitivity of the i-f amplifier is dmvll circuit, proceed as follows:
60 db at these frequencies. (1) Connect the receiver to Test Unit 1-104-A and
(4) The arithmetic average of the two frequencies to the a-f output meter. Turn the CONTROL SWITCH
determined in (2). above, should be 6,900 ±1O kc. of the test unit to the AVC position. Turn the IN-
CREASE OUTPUT control to its maximum clockwise
(5) Adjust the signal generator voltage to the
value determiried in (1), above. Tune the generator positibn.
to the frequency which gives maximum a-f output. (2) Adjust the signal generator for an output of
Reduce the output voltage of the generator until an 6,900 ±5 kc, modulated 30 per cent at 400 or 1.000 cps.
a-f output of 10 milliv..,'atts is again obtained. The Connect the grounded terminal of the signal generator
ratio of this voltage to that determined in (1) should to the receiver chassis and the ungrounded terminal to
be not less than 0.7. the grid of the mixer tube (terminal 4 of V-102).
(3) Turn the squelch adjustment of the re-
16. A-F MEASUREMENTS ceiver to its maximum clockwise position.
30 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 17
In the procedures given in the following paragraphs, (35) to (49) Re-trim the coils and capacitors of the
it is sometimes specified that a measurement is to be harmonic generator sta~es on channel A.
made at either test point C or test point' D. In these (50) to (57) Re-trim the coils and capacitors of the
cases, point C should always be tried first and then, if r-f amplifier stage on channel A.
it is found that a satisfactory meter reading cannot be (58) to (60) Re-trim the final tuned circuit of the
obtained, test point D should be used. In this con- harmonic generator stage, and, if neces-
nection, it must be remembered that the stud just sary, the final tuned circuit of the r-f
above D carries positive plate potential; accidental amplifier stage, on channel A.
contact between this. stud and the lead to the test
meter will almost certainly destroy the-,meter. At the (61) Repeat previous steps. as required, until
time of manufacture the stud is covered with varnished all tuned circuits track, within ± 5 per
tubing. If this tubing becomes detached it should be cent, on channel A and channel D.
replaced before any tests are made. (62) to (65) Mak~ final trimming adjustments of the
first four harmonic generator tuned
In some cases it may he found that a usable reading
circuits on channel C (144 mc).
cannot be obtained with the test meter connected to
either test point C or test point D. In such cases, (66)and(67) Check setting of frequency dial on
remove the screen potential from the mixer tube, channel B (120 mc) and channel C
V-102, by unsoldering one lead of the 39,OOO-ohm (144 mc).
resistor (R-llO) which is connected between terminal Before starting the r-f alignment, remove the dust
6 of the tube socket and the adjacent stand-off cover and r-f shield on the tube side of the receiver'.
terminal. The removal of screen potential reduces the Connect the receiver to Test Unit I-I04-A. Set the
plate current of the tube to a very small value, thereby CONTROI" SWITCH of the test unit to MVC, the METER
removing approximately-] volts of cathode bias \\lhich SWITCH to position 3, the INCREASE OUTPUT control to
normally opposes current flow in the test meter. its maximum clockwise position, and the CHANNEL
SELECTOR to position A. Connect the TEST METER
c. RADIO-FREQUENCY CIRCUIT ALIGN-
MENT. binding posts to flexible leads which are terminated
in small insulated test clips. Connect the r-f signal
The purpose of the following procedure is to adjust generator through Antenna TS-79/U or its equivalent
tuned circuits ZeIOl, Z-102, Z-103 and Z-107 to Z-112, (a 50-ohm non-inductive resistor) to the antenna jack
inclusive, so that they are resonant at the proper on the face of the receiver. Insert Crystal Units DC-31
frequencies' throughout ,the entire tuning range of the in the crystal sockets of the receiver as follows:
recei ver, 100 to 156 megacycles.
Channel A Crystal frequency, 4045.833 kc; Signal
It will be seen that the r-f circuit alignment pro- frequency, 104 me.
cedure is given ill sixty-seven successive steps, desig-
nated (1) to (67), inclusive. The general sequence of Channel B Crystal frequency, 4712.500 kc; Signal
operations is: frequency, 120 me.
RESTRICTED 81
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraph 17 AN 08-10-195
If any of the r-f tuned circuit units (Z-101, Z-102, (10) Note the reading of the test meter and then
etc.) have been replaced, set their trimming capacitors adjust trimmer capacitor C-166 for peak reading. If
and coil tuning slugs in approximately the same posi- this peak reading is only slightly greater than the pre-
tiolls as those of the replaced units or of the old units viously noted n'ading, let the trimmer remain in posi-
which remain in the receiver. tion. If the peak is ITlOl'e than about J 0 per cent above
the prPviously noted reading, continue rotation of
Set the cams of the tuning selector so that when it the trimmer in the sa'llze.direction until the meter reads
is operated to channel A, the frequency dial on the about half-way between its initial and peak values.
face of the receiver reads exactly 104 me; also~ so that
on channel D, it reads exactly 156 me. Operate the (11) Trim coil L-ll1 for peak meter reading.
selector electrically several times after these adjust- (12) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-170. Use the
ments to check that the frequency indications are method given in step (10), above.
correct. (13) Trim coil L-112 for peak meter reading.
Proceed with the r-f circuit alignment as follows: (14) Connect the negative test meter lead to test
point B.
(1) Connect the positive lead from the test meter
to the receiver chassis and the negative lead to test (15) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-17S. Use the
point A. method given in step (10).
(2) Operate the receiver on channel A and adjust (16) Trim coil L-I13 for peak meter reading.
the tuning slugs of coils L-ll! and L-1l2 for peak
(17) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-179. Use the
deflections of the test meter.
method given in step (10).
(3) Connect the negative meter lead to test
(18) Trim coil L-115 for peak meter reading.
point B and adjust coils L-1l3 and L-11S for peak
meter readings. (19) Connect the negative test meter lead to test
point C or point D.
(4) Connect the negative meter lead to test
point C and adjust coils L-1l7 and L-llS for peak (20) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-JS5. Use the
meter reading. If a usable reading cannot be obtained, method given in step (10).
shift to test point D. (Be careful of the high voltage
(21) Trim coil L-117 for peak meter reading.
on the adjacent stud.)
(22) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-189. Use the
(.I) Connect the positive test meter lead to test
method given in step (10).
point E and the negative lead to test point F.
(23) Trim coil L-118 for peak meter reading.
(6) Adjust the signal generator to produce an
unmodulated signal of approximately 0.1 volt at (24) Connect the positive test meter lead to test
104 mO'. point E and the negative lead to point F.
(7) Slowly rock the frequency dial of the signal (25) Slowly vary the frequency dial of the signal
generator about its 104 me point, meanwhile observing generator about its 156 me point, meanwhile observing
the test meter. Tune for peak reading of the'test the test meter. TUlle for peak reading of the test
meter, reducing the signal voltage as necessary to meter, reducing the signal voltage as necessary to keep
keep the test meter reading at or below 20 scale the test meter reading at or below 20 scale divisions.
divisions. Leave the frequency of the generator at Leave the frequency of the signal generator at the
the point of peak meter reading. point of peak meter reading.
(8) Adjust coils L-101, L-I02 and L-103 for peak (26) Adjuet trimmer capacitor C-103. Use the
readings of the test meter. Reduce the signal voltage method given in step (10).
as necessary to keep the meter deflections at or below
(27) Trim coil L-101 for peak meter reading.
20 scale divisions. (If the signal generator frequency
varies with the setting of its output attenuator, it may (2S) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-111. Use the
be necessary to retune the generator during this method given in step (10).
procedure.)
(29) Trim coil L-l02 for peak meter reading.
(9) Operate the CHANNEL SELECTOR switch of the
(30) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-llS. Use the
test unit to chan riel D. Connect the positive test
method given in step (10).
meter lead to the receiver chassis and the negative lead
to test point A. (31) Trim coil L-l03 for peak meter reading.
82 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraph 17
(32) Connect the positive test meter lead to the (51) Adjust the signal generator for an output
receiver chassis and the negative lead to test point voltage of about 0.1 volt. Slowly rock its frequency
Cor D. dial about the 104 mc point, meanwhile observing the
(33) Adjust trimmer capacitor C-189 for peak test meter. Tune for a peak reading of the test meter,
test meter reading. reducing the signal voltage as Jlecessary to keep the
reading at or bdow 20 scale divisions. Leave the
(34) If the peak meter reading found in step (33) is frequency of the signal generator at the point -of peak
more than 10 per cent greater than the initial reading, test meter reading.
connect the test meter leads to p'oints E and F and ad-
just trimmer capacitor C-l1S for peak meter reading. . (52) Trim coil L·101. Use the method of step
(36).
(35) Operate the CHANNEL SELECTOR switch of.
the test unit to channel A. Connect. the positive test. (53) Trim capacitor C-l03 for peak test meter
meter lead to the receiver chassis and the negative lead reading.
to test point A. (54) Trim coil L-l02. Use the method of step
(36) Note the meter reading and then adjust coil (36).
L· 111 for peak meter reading. If this peak is only (55) Trim capacitor C-ll1 for peak meter
slightly greater than the previously noted reading, let reading.
the coil adjustment alone. If the peak is more than (56) Trim coil L·l03. Use the method of step
about. 10 per cent above the previously noted reading, (36).
continue rotation of t.he coil adjustment screw in the
same direction until the meter reads about half-way be- (57) Trim capacitor C-115 for peak meter
tween the initial and the peak values. reading.
(.37) Trim capacitor (".166 for peak meter reading. (58) Connect the positive test meter lead to the
receiver chassis and the negative lead to test point
(38) Trim coil L·112. Use the method of step Cor D.
(36), above.
(59) Trim coil L·118 for peak test meter reading.
(39) Trim capacitor C·170 for peak meter
reading. (60) If the peak meter reading found in step (59)
is more than 10 per cent greater than the initial
(40) Connect the negative test meter lead to test reading, connect the test meter leads to test points E
point B. and F and trim coil L-l03 for peak meter reading.
(41) Trim'coil L·113. Use the method of step (61) Repeat any Or all of steps (9) to (60), inclu·
(36). sive, as necessary, until all tuned circuits track \vithin
(42) Trim capacitor C·175 for peak meter 5 per cent at signal frequencies of 104 and 156 mega~
reading. cycles.
(43) Trim coil L·1l5. Use the method of step (62) Connect the positive lead from the test meter
( 36). to the chassis and the negative lead to test point A.
Carefully tune the receiver to channel C (144 mc).
(44) Trim capacitor C-179 for peak meter
reading. (63) Trim capacitors C-166 and C-170 for peak
meter readings.
(45) Connect the negative test meter lead to test
point C or D. (64) \Vith the receiver still tuned to channel C,
connect the negative test lead to point B.
(46) Trim coil L·1l7. Use the method of step
(36). (65) Trim capacitors C·175 anel C·I79 for peak
meter readings.
(47) Trim capacitor C-185 for peak meter
reading. (66) Tune the receiver to channel B (120 mc).
The frequency dial on the face of the receiver should
(48) Trim coil L·118. Use the method of step indicate approximately 120.
(36).
(67) Tune the receiver to channel C (144 me).
(49) Trim capacitor C·189 for peak meter The frequency dial on the face of the receiver should
reading. indicate approximately 144.
(50) Connect the positive test meter lead to test The radio~frequency tuned circuits of the receiver are
point E and the negative kad to point F. now aligned. .
RESTRICTED 83
Section V RESTRICTED
Paragraphs 17-18 AN 08-10-195
d. HARMONIC GENERATOR DRIVE (5) Repeat steps (3) and (4), using 156 me instead
MEASUREMENTS. of 104 me. The meter reading should be at least
After the radio-frequency tuned circuits have been 9 scale divisions.
aligned, the drive of the harmonic generator stages (6) Replace the four crystal units and reconnect
should be checked. To do this, connect the receiver to resistor R-llO.
Test Unit I-104-A, as before, and tune it to each of the
four crystal-controlled channels (104 mc, 120 mc, 144 18. OVER-ALL RECEIVER MEASUREMENTS
mc and 156 mc). The signal generator is not used.
Proceed as follows: a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED.
(1) Connect the positive test meter lead to the In order to carry out the over-all tests of the VHF
receiver chassis and the negative lead to test point A. receiver which are described in the following para~
graphs, it is necessary to have a test bench equipped
(2) Operate the receiver to channel A and observe with a Test Equipment AN/GRM-l, an audio-fre-
the test meter reading. Do the same on channels quency output power meter (see paragraph ld (2) of
B, C and D. In each case the meter reading should be this section), and an r-f standard signal generator (see
a t least 28 scale divisions. paragraph ld (4) of this section). If the tests are to
(3) Connect the negative test meter lead to test include one for over-all sensitivity, it is essential that
point B. the signal generator be capable of modulation at 30
per cent, 400 or 1,000 cycles per second, with negligible
(4) Observe the meter reading on each of the four
frequency 'modulation.
channels. I t should be, in each case, at least 20 scale
divisions. b. RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL GIECK.
(5) Remove the screen potential from the mixer To check the receiver noise level, proceed as follows:
tube, V-l02, by unsoldering one lead of resistor R-llO,
(1) Connect the receiver to the Test Unit I-l04-A
which is connected between terminal 6 of the tube
and to the output power meter.
socket and the adjacent stand-off terminal.
(2) Insert an artificial antenna, TS-79/U, or its
(6) Connect the negative test meter lead to test equivalent (a 50-ohm non-inductive resistor) in the
point D. antenna jack of the receiver. Short~circuit the arti-
(7) Observe the meter reading on each of the four ficial antenna with a short piece of wire at least as
channels. It should be, in each case, at least 18 scale large as 20 gauge.
divisions. (3) Operate the receiver on any crystal-controlled
channel in the MVC condition.
e. R-F AIVlPLIFIER GAIN MEASUREMENTS. (4) Turn the INCREASE OUTPUT control to its
To measure the gain of the r-f amplifier stage, con- extreme clockwise position and read the output meter.
nect the receiver to Test Unit I-104-A, as before; also, The reading should not exceed two milliwatts (0.77
connect it to the r-f signal generator through artificial volt).
antenna TS-79/U or its equivalent (a SO-ohm non- (5) Turn the INCREASE OUTPUT control to its
inductive resistor). Remove the four Crystal Units extreme counter-clockwise position and read the out-
DC-3l from the receiver. Then proceed as follows: put meter. The reading.should not exceed 50 micro-
(1) Remove screen potential from the grid of the watts (0.039 volt).
mixer tube, V-102, by unsoldering one Jead of resistor c. AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL
R-llO. MEASUREMENT.
(2) Connect the positive test meter lead to the To measure the automatic volume control character-
receiver chassi~ 'and the negative lead to test point D. istic, proceed as follows:
(3) Turn the frequency dial of the receiver to the (1) Connect the receiver to Test Unit I-104-A and
104 mc point. to the output power meter. -Also connect it, through
the artificial antenna, TS-79/U or its equivalent, to
(4) Adjust the signal generator to an output of
0.1 volt, 104 me, unmodulated. Rock the frequency
.
the r~f signal generator.
.
(2) Operate the receiver on any crystal-controlled
control of the generator about the 104 mark, until a
channel in the AVC condition.
peak reading is observed on the test meter. This
reading should be at least 9 scale divisions if the gain (3) Adjust the signal generator for an output of
of the r~f amplifier is satisfactory. 1,000 microvolts, modulated 30 per cent at 400 or 1,000
84 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section V
AN 08-10-195 Paragraphs 18·19
cps, at the receIver frequency. Tune it carefully to (1) Connect the receiver to Test Unit I-I04-A
the receiver. and to the output power meter. Also connect it,
(4) Adjust the INCREASE OUTPUT control of the through the artificial antenna, TS-79-U or its equiva-
test unit until the output of the receiver is 100 milli- lent, to the signal generator.
watts (5.5 volts across 300 ohms). (2) Operate the receiver on crystal-controlled
(5) Increase the voltage of the signal generator to channel A (104 me) in the MVC condition, with the
0.1 volt. The outp!.!t of the receiver should be between INCREASE OUTPUT control set for maximum audio
100 and 354 milliwatts (5.5 and 10.3 volts). output.
(6) Reduce the voltage of the signal generator to (3) Adjust the signal generator for an output of
20 microvolts. The output of the receiver should be at 104 me modulated 30 percent at 400 or 1,000 cps. Care-
least 22.5 milliwatts and not more than 100 milliwatts fully tune the frequency of the generator about its
(2.6 to 5.5 volts across 300 ohms) .. 104 calibration point until a peak reading is obtained
on the output meter.
d. OVER-ALL SENSITIVITY MEASURE-
MENT. (4) Vary the voltage of the signal generator until
As mentioned previously, the precise measurement the a-f output of the receiver is 10 milliwatts. The
of the over-,all receiver sensitivity requires the use of a voltage of the signal required to produce this output
signal generator which can be modulated 30 pel" cent should not be more than 10 microvolts.
with practically no frequency modulation. Even a slight (S) Repeat steps (2), (3) and (4) on channel B
amount of frequency modulation will result in serious (120 me), channel C (144 me) and channel D (156 mc).
error and misleading results. If there is any doubt In each case the signal voltage required to obtain an
about the signal generator, it is recommended that a a-f output of 10 milliwatts should be 10 microvolts or
rough qualitative check of sensitivity be made as less.
follows (this assunles that the i-f and r-f stages have
been properly aligned and that the i-f response is 19. OTHER TeSTS AND MEASUREMENTS
known to be satisfactory) : In addition to the tests and measurements described
(1) Operate the receiver in the MVC condition in the preceding paragraphs, there are a number of
with the INCREASE OUTPUT control. adjusted for maxi- procedures which can be used in checking the per-
mum volume. Do not have anything attached to the formance of the VHF components. However, many
antenna jack. of them require apparatus and techniques which are
(2) Tune the receiver through crystal-controlled seldom available for field maintenance and are of
channel A (104 me) by operating the frequency dial on doubtful value in connection with practical servicing.
the face. There should be a noticeable increase in Therefore, the detailed methods involved are not
background noise as the dial is moved past the 104 given in this text. Some of the requirements are in-
point. cludedin the tables of supplementary data in Section
VI. In this. connection it should be pointed out that
(3) Repeat step (2) on channel B (120 me), these requirements are intended to apply at the time
channel C (144 me) and channel D (1S6 me). The of manufacture; they do not necessarily apply, in all
same result should be obtained on each channel. particulars, to equipment which has been in service,
If it is known that the signal generator can be modu- and which has been subjected to the deterioration
lated with negligible frequency modulation, the over- which results from wear and tear, shipping, handling,
all sensitivity can be measured as follows: operation, etc.
RESTRICTED 85
RESTRICTED Seelion VI
Alii 08-10-195 Tables 1-3
TABLE 1
AUDIO-FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The audio-frequency response characteristics (fidelity) of the VHF receiver should be tested under the
following conditions:
Input: 100 microvolts
Modulation: 30 per cent
Volume Control: Retarded to limit the output to 50 milliwatts when using 400-cycle modulation.
Reference Level: 50 milliwatts (3.87 volts) when using 400-cycle modulation.
Load Impedance: 300 ohms, resistive.
The response characteristics should then be within the following limits:
400 cps: 50 milliwatts (3.87 volts).
90 cps: greater than 10 milliwatts (1.73 volts).
3500 cps: greater than 18 milliwatts (2.32 volts).
6000 cps: less than 12.5 milliwatts (L94volts).
TABLE 2
FREQUENCY STABILITY DATA
The frequency of the carrier transmitted by the VHF transmitter does not deviate more than 0.02%
from the assigned frequency under any condition likely to be encountered in service. These conditions
include ambient temperatures from -30 to +40 degrees Centigrade.
The resonant frequency of the VHF receiver does not deviate more than 0.04% from the assigned
frequency under any condition likely to be encountered in service.
TABLE 3
RESTRICTED 87
Sed; on If! RESTRICTED
Table 4 AN 011-10-195
TABLE '"
VACUUM TUBE DATA
VALUES SHOWN ARE CHARACTERISTIC RATINGS FOR THE TYPE OF TUBE; THEY
ARE NOT NECESSARILY THE VALUES AT WHICH THE TUBES ARE OPERATED
IN THE EQUIPMENT
I
I
JAN- 717A 12SH7 '12SL7GT 12A6* 1625 832A
TYPE I -
VT- 269 288 289 134 136 286
,I
V-WI V-l03 V-lOS V-l07 , V-301 V-303
CIRCUIT REFERENCE V-l02 V-l04 I V-I06 V-302 V-304
SYMBOL V-l09 V-108
V-110
--~------- - ,
Heater Volts 6.3 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6
~-
----
Heater Amp. 0.160 0.138 0.138 0.138 0.405 0.72
to 0.190 to 0.162 to 0.162 to 0.162 to 0.495 to 0.88
~~-- -
Control Grid Volts -2 , -1 -2 -12.5 -29 -35
---- ------ ~---
88 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Section VII
AN 08-10-195 Table 5
TABLE .5
for
MODEl. AN/ARC-S
VHF COMPONENTS
NOTES
1. This Table does not contain a complete list of components of Model AN/ ARC-S
Aircraft Radio Equipment but covers only those components furnished on
Contract NXsa-40001 and which differ from the LF, MF and HF components
of Model AN/ARC-S Aircraft Radio Equipment. The principal components
of the latter equipment are covered in Volume 1.
3. The sign #, when shown in the second column of this Table, indicates that
the part is not included in the Spare Parts List for components furnished on
U. S. Navy Contract NXsa-40001.
RESTRICTED 89
"ro ....::to'"
....
IT
0
~
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS '" ;a
MODEL ATRCR!'IFT RADIO EQUIPMENT AN/ARC-5 MAJOR UNIT RADIO 'rRA;TSMITTER T-23/ARC-S
ARMy STOCK NUMBER
REFERENCE NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEF DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
300- 399 RADIO TRANSMITTER T-23/ARC-S FOr voice 'or tOne radio WECO
Series trans~is3ion on anyone D-151925 B- 35112
Channel A Cbsnnel B Channel C of 4 preset frequencies D-15 17 59 B- 32616
100-124 Me 122_146 Me 122-146 Me
A_ 301 # COVER: Cover and ventilator top over chassis. Protection of parts on WECO
15'-3/8 by 5-1/2 by 5-1/2 in. approx. overall upper side of chassis
dimensions. 0.063 in. 1/4 hard aluminum sheet.
A-302 # COVER ASSEMBLY: Bottom cover (wit!";Qut chart) En~loses lower part of WECO
11_ 3/4 by 5-1/2 by S/d in. overall. chassis
A- 303 # COVER: Cover and mounting for 3-302 and 3-309. Access to lower fror.t of WECO ES-6g2015
AlUminum sheet 0.064 in. thick 3-7/& by 2-1/4 in. chassis and terminals of
4 holes 0.125 in. a~ corners. 2 holes 1.1)0 in. 3-307 and 3-309
dia. on horizontal center.
.
A_)04 COVER; Cap and chain assemqly for J-307. Cap Protection against exposlli"""e WECO
1-7132 in. dia. by 0.250 in. high. llS-T3 of high voltage at con-
aluminum or bright red phenol plastic. tacts of J-307 ;r.
'"
m
....
V> A_ 305 ADAPTER PLATE: 0.0937 in. steel by 1-11/16 by To mount B-301 in 2-301 WECO Es-69 2 352
:z
o '"m~
1~11/16 in.
--
holes 0.152 die., 6 holes 0.152 in.
)! CO
'"....
i'i dia. Counterbore 0.312 in. dla. assembled as
part of 2-301.
•
o, a'"m
m
o B-30l MOTOR: 28v DC ball bearing shunt wound 3000 rpm Drives channel selectin.§; Oster
1/60 hp Intermi~tent duty, totally enclosed,
equiyped with worm. Worm 5/8 In. long. Motor
mechanism Ks-s968
List 01
ES-691677
~ "
1-1/2 in. die.by 3-29/32 in long including shaft
on both ends and gear on one end. Shaft 3/16 in.
dia. assembled as part of Z-301.
B- 30M BRUSE ASSEMBJS: Positive, Stackpole grade LX-84-S Conducts current to Oster
armature Part No.
853
B_ 301B BRUSH ASSE~BLY: Negative, Stackpole grade LX-84-s Conducts current to Oster
armature Part No.
854
B-301C CAP: Screw cap Retains brush in holder Oster
Part No.
765
Note: # sign, inserted in column 2, indicates that
the part is not included in the Spare Parts
List.
C-301 CAPACITOR: FiXed, molded, Silvered mica, 30 MMF Osc. grid coupling CD 5R
± 2%, 500 WVDC, 15/32 by 51/64 by 7/32 in. {max.) EL-!<'lENCO
leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long. 603M
c_ 302 CAPACITOR: Fixed, molded silvered mica, 300 I>"J.1F Osc. cathode couplir.g CD 5R B-40035
± 2%, 500 WVDC, 15/32 b;y 51/6l+ by 7/32 in. (max.), EL-MENCO
leads No, 20 wire 1 in. long. 603M
c- 303 CAPACITOR: Fixed, molded mica, 3000 MMF, 800 WVDC, Oso. soreen by-pass CD lW or ID B-40034
53/64 by 53/64 by 11/32 in. (max.), leads No. EL-MENCO
18 wire 1 in. long. 50 2 L
c- 304 CAPACITOR: Same as C-303; assembled as part of Osc. plate cirC1J:lt by-pass
z- 302.
c_ 305 CAPACITOR: Fixed, molded, silvered mica, 25 MMF 1st h-g grid coupling CD 5W 8-40037
± 5%, 800 WVDC, 15/32 by 51/6l+ by 7/32 in, (max.) EL-r.mrrCO
leads No, 20 wire I in. long. 503M
>
'"....m C-306 CAPACITOR: Same ., C-303 l,t h-g COl t,fwde lly-pass Z
"''"
'"-, ...'"
V> II>
'"....
(i
m
0-3 07
c- 308
C.-\PACITOR:
CAPACITOR:
2-3 03.
Same
Same
e, C-303
'"!. ...
(i
m
'" C-309 CAPACITOR: Same ae C-303 1st h-g filament by-pass '"'"
C
0-310 CAPACITOR: Fixed, silvered mica button, 500 MMF 2nd h-g cathode by-pass Erie ES-691628
± 10%, 500 WVDC, assembled as part of X-303.
O.l+SO in. die,. by 17/32 in. high, overall. Wax
impregnated.
C-311 CAPACITOR: Same as 0"310 2nd h-g term. 1 heater
by-pass
C-312 CAPACI~OR: Same as C-310 2nd h-g term. 7 heater
by-pass
c- 313 CAPACITOR: Same as C-310 2nd h-g screen by-pass
C-314 CAPACITOR: Fixed, silvered ceramiC, 500 romf ± 10%, 2nd h-g plate circuit by- Erie ES-692151
1500 WVDC wax impregnated. T~mperature pass
coefficie~t negative 750 x 10- 6 MMF/MHF/QC, 15/16
In. dia. by 7/8 in. high.
C-:H5 CAPACITOR: Fixed, silvered ceramic, 3 MMF ± 0.25 R-F amp. term. 2 grid Erie ES-692190
MMF, 750 WVDC. Temyerature coefficient negative coupling
750 x 10- 6 MMF/MMFjoG ± 15%. 3/4 in. long by 7/32
in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
C-316 CAPACITOR: Same as C-315 R-F amp. term. 6 grid
coupling
0-317 CAPACITOR: Same as C-310 except assembled as part R-F amp. cathode r-f by-
of X-304. pass
0-318 CAPACITOR: Same as 0-310 R-F amp. term. 1 heater
by-pass
0-319 CAPACITOR; Same eo 0-310 R-F emp. term. 7 by-paes
»
Z
...'"'"
m '"....m'"
-..,'".•
0-320 CAPACITOR: SAme e, C-310 R-F amp. .screen by-pass 0
'"
i'i 0-321 CAPACITOR: Dry electro1~tic, 15 MF. 35 WVDC, R-F amp. cathode a-f by-- CD, Mallory ES-6920r6 '"
i'i
....
....
m
1-1/8 in. dia. by 1-3/ in. high pass Sprague 0
m
0 0-322 CAPAC:ITOR: Same as C-314 R-F amp. plate ciren! t 0
by-pass '"
C-323 CAPACITOR: VAriable, air, 5.0-17.5 MMF. assembled Antenna coupling adjust-
as part of'Z-30l. ment, one for each channel
0-325 CAPACITOR: Same as C-321 'Supply voltage a-f nOise
fil ter
C-3 29A,B CAPACITOR: Fixed, silvered mica buttons, 2000/2000 C-329A motor field r-f Erie E3-692835
MMF ± 20%, 500 WYnC, assembled as part of Z-301 by-pass
C-329B motor armature r-f
by-pass
0-330 # CAPACITOR: Fixed, silvered mica button, 500 MMF Motor armature r-f by-pass Erie
± 10%, 500 VDC test, assembled with B-30l. Type 370
c- 333 # CAPACITOR; Fixed, molded mica, 1000 ~~F ± 29%, h-g cathode to screen
300 WVDC, assembled as part of X- 303. 11/16 by
7/16 by 13/64 in. thick (max.). Type MO
0,
'"....
n
m Ta~ped, 6-32 tp~ead, 1/4 in. deep at each end, No. 395
C m
3/tl by 5/8 in. C
E-30 7 TERMINAL STRIP: Similar to E-30l, except part of
2-301, 4 contact springs, 2 terminals, 2-1/2 by
t, for 309, 5-310,
s~
plates of V-)04
ES-692812 '"
'"
7/8 by 7/8 in.
E-308 MOUNTING PLATE: Riveted assembly, contact on for 3-312 E3-692765
steatite, forward side of Z-30l. 1-3/8 by 7/8
by 13/16 in.
E-309 SPRING: Spring plate, assembled as part of Z-302, body of X-3D4 Es-69 2 914
0.020'phosphor bronze, silver plated, 1.875 by
0.250 by 0.500.
E-31O SPRING: Same 8S E-309, except part of Z-303. body of X-303
E-311 # ADAPTER: Knurled knob, extension of shaft of 8-101. of cha.nnel ES-693897
(This ~art integral with motor shaft in later
models) 0.250 dia. by 1/4 in. high, steel.
E- 312 SPRING: Contact s~ringJ assembled as part of Z-302. shleld between ES-692924
5/8 by 5/B by 7/16 in., 0.010 in. phosphor bronze, L-302 and L-30B
silver plated.
II>
m
...a o·~
IT
";§
"'"
....C '"
O·
~
MODEL !\IRCRAFT RADIO EQUIP)I.E:IT AN/ARC-5 MAJOR UNIT RADIO TRANSM:J::TTER T-23/ARC-S ~
ARMY srOCK NUMBER
REFERENCE NAVY TYPE NUMBER MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
E- 313 SPRING: Same as E-3:!.2, except assembled as part Grounds sh~eld between
of 2-303. L- 303 and L- 305
H- 301 STUD: Conical Jacking stud Securing transmitter in WECO 4710
rack
H- 502 # NUT: 5/8 in. - 24 ring nut, furnis:ted wi th K- 301. Fits J-301 and J-302 se- WECO Es-69360 0
3/4 in. O.D. 5/8 in. - 24 tap. 1/8 in. high. curing K-301 to panel
Nickel plate or zinc plate finish.
H-)05 SPRING YOKE: Spring yoke furnished with Z-301. Secures L- 311 coil forms in 'dEeO ES-5956 84
Phosphor bronze 0.020 in. thick 1-1/2 by 0.032 by rotor of Z-301
1/4 in.
H- 304 SPRING AS8EM]3I.Y: Snrir,.g yoke) screw and was,:er Secures co.:U forms in "WECO ES-693131
assembly, furnished with 2-302. 1-1/2 by 7/16 in. rotor of Z-302
high.
H-}05 SPRING ASSEMBLY: Same as H-304 except part of Secures coil forms in rotor
2-3 0 3. of Z-.303
»
'"'"'"
....
H- 306 CABLE CLA:.1P: Small cable clamp, sheet steel Secures cable from K-301 to WECO E8-693 4 7 8 Z
'"m
0.0)12. 3/8 by 3/8 by 3/16 in. overall, cadmium front panel
....
'"0, n'"'"
0
1!!
-,
plated.
....
('I
E-')07 CABLE CLAMP: Large cable clamp, sheet steel ....m
...'"-
m Sec:;.res cable 'w"ECO B-31401
I:> 0.0312 in. thick, cadml~~ or zinc plated.
1-5/32 by 3/8 by 9/16 in. I:>
E-308 CABLE CLAMP: Same as H-307 Secures cable
1:l-309 RETAINER: Retainer ring 0.632 O.D. 0.375 I.D. Prevents complete with- WECO ES-593 0 91
0.291 in. high, 0.010 in. aluminum or sheet drawal of cores in 1-311
brass. Assembled between coil forms and front
rotor plate of turret Z-301.
J- 301 # JACK: Receptacle; part of K-30l, accepts plug Antenna connection
PL-259·
J- 302 # JACK: Same as J-301 Antenna co~qection to
receiver
J-30 3 JACK: 4-contact, receptacle assembly, 1-3/8 by 1 Takes llU g P-303 (part of 'trEe:) E8-691995
by 1/2 in. X-303
J- 304 JACK: Same as J-303 Takes ~lug P-304 (part of
X-304)
-.
V> armature into contact with pole face. 14 V. must
~
not close either pair of contaots, 1-:;/8 by I by .... II>
"
K-303 RELAY: Same as K-j02 Audio and key!.ng control
-'"o, m
'" "
K-}04- RELAY: Relay, transfers two Circuits, coil re- Control for B-301 Allied ,_¥ ES-692868
sistance 250 ohms ± 5%, relay shall operate at No. BJ6-...r-
any voltage between 18 and 52 v. DC. All con- DPDT
tacts have a break of 0-015 min., 2-5/16 by
1-1/2 by 1 In.
K-505 RELAY: Same as K-)02, windings paralleled,contacts Aux. high voltage control,
in series. for circuit protection at
high altitude
K-306 RELAY: SPDT plus SPST, 1-1/2 by 2-1/4 by 1-5/8 In. Plats voltage and voltage WECO 7735
2 coils, series aiding, each 2500 turns No. 35 AWG regulator control
enamelled copper wire, 90-cr~s ± 10%.
L-301 INDUCTOR: U:r..iversal wO\L'1d choke, 0.5 MH. 1-1/8 in. Osc. cathode circuit WECO Es-693!!C5
hi&~, 1/2 in. dia. i:npedance Type 200A
0
'"
n
m -t
a L-311 INDUCTOR: Coil assembly wound on ceramic forms .!.. m
with adjustable cores of po¥dered iron and silVer a
plated copp.er; assembles in frent turret 2-)01- '"....
100-12~ MC range Char~el A (front turret) WECO ES-693863
122-1~6 Me range ChaJ4~els Band C (front turret) WECO ES-693864
152-156 Me range Channel D (front turret) WECO Es-693865
L-312 INDUCTOR: 3/~ turn, 0.886 I·D. No. 14 AWG silver Output coupling to L-311, WECO ES-693866
plated copper wire assembled as part of Z-301. one for each cha~~e1
L-,31j INDUCTOR: Choke coil, 2.1 - 2.5 mho Osc. grid bias reactance Hanh'11ar 1und ES-695557
Current rating 125 MA. Resistance 26 - 50 ohms. No. CHX
Distributed ~apacity 1 MMF. National
No. RIOO
Miller
No. 4-537
0-305 COUPLING: 6 position coupling 0·3l2 in. O.D., CouplL~g betveen 0-}07 WECO Es-691722
0.2~5 in. I.D. by 17/32 in. long. has 6 holes and drive shaft of Z-301
0.007 in. dia. Slot on one end 0.156 in. deep by
0.067 in. wide. Made of half hard bress.
REFERENCE ~RA~~ ~~~~K ~tYM~lff NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBER DESIGNAT~~ SPEC. NO.
0-3 06 PIN: Annealed steel wire 0.0625 in. by 1 in. c.p. Secures 0-305 to 0-307 T,{ECQ Es-E91';'19
0-307 SHAFT: Flexible shaft assembly 2-7/16 in. long. Coupling between 2-301 and White ES-691718
2-5/32 in. between set screws, slot on one end, Z-302 No.3594X-Q.
0.0635 in. wide by 5/32 in. deep. Shaft 3/16 In.
dia.
"'"....
m
OJ R-302
7/32 in. din., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
Allen Bradley, 3/8 in. long by 9/64 in. dia.
RESISTOR: Composition, 200 ohms ± 5%, 1/2 watt, Osc. grid current
IRCTy,pe
BT-1/2
AB Type ES-695688
- • ....
m
molded phenolic insulation, IRe, 5/8 in long by
7/32 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
measuring EB-2015
IRe Type
"
Allen Bradley, 3/8 in. long by 9/64 in. dia. BT-l/2
R- 303 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 500 op~s ± 5%, 8 watts, Osc. cathode bias WI, 1-1/2Z
vitreous enamel insulation, 1-1/2 in. long by No. 206
5/16 in. dia., lugs, 17/32 in. long by 3/16 in. term.
wide.
R-304 RESISTOR: Composition, 27,000 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, 1st h-g grid AB Type ES-6g2297
molded phenolic insulation, 9/16 in. long oy GB-27)1
7/32 in. dia., leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 in. long.
R-305 RESISTOR: Composition, 51 ohms t 5%, 1/2 watt, 1st h-g grid current AB Type ES-695 6 79
molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by 9/64 measuring EB-5105
in. dia., leads No. 20 wire, 1 in. long. IRe Type
BT-l/2
R-306 RESISTOR: Same as R- 303. 1st h-g catbode btas
R-307 RESISTOR: Same 8.S R-305, except assembled as part 2nd h-g grid current
of Z-303. measuring
R· 308 RESISTOR, CompDsition, 51,000 ohms ± 5%, 1/2 watt, 2nd h-g grid, tLtlit No.1 AB Type
molded phenolic insulation; part of 2-303, IRe, EB-5135
3/8 in. long by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire IReT>:pO
1 in. long. BT-l/2
R- 309 RESISTOR: Same as R-308. 2nd h-g grid, unit No.2
R- 310 RESISTOR: Same as R- 303. 2nd h-g cathode bias
R-}l1 RESISTOR: Composition, 47 ohms, ± 20%, 1/2 watt, 2nd h-g plate circuit AB Type Es- 6 9219:
molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by oscillation SUppressor EB-4702
9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1-1/2 in. long. IRe Ty;pe
BT-l/2
R-3l2 RESISTOR: ComposlUon, 20,000 ohms ± 5%, 1/2 watt, R-F a.mp. grid, unit No.1 AB Type Es-692198
molded pher;oliC insulation, )/8 in. long by EB-2035
9/64 in. dia. leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long. IRe T>:pe
BT-1/2
R- 313 .RESISTOR: Same as R- 312 R-F amp. grid, unit No.2
l>
'"m R- 314 RESISTOR: Same as R- 305 R-F amp. grid current :z
....
V> measuring
'"....
m
, '"
0
....m'" --
R-)15 RESIS'l-,OR: Wire wound, _ 300 ohms ± '?-%' 12 watts, ~"'F amp. cathode bias WL Special CO
r; Es-692617
vitreous enamel insu.lat,1,on. 2 in. long by 5/lt~ in
O.D. by 5/32 in. I.D., 2 termina.ls, 17/32 in. high
Type 2" Z
No. 206 0, '"....
;:;
o by 3/16 in. wide. Term. m
o::!
RESISTOR: Same as R-}ll -F _amp. plate Circuit
oscillation suppressor
'"'"
R-319 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 15,000 ohms ± 5%, 10 watts, Potential divider for ES-692613
WL T;;J;'
vitreous enamel insulation, 1-3/4 in. long by screen biases 1-".5 4 z
5/16 in. O.D. by 5/32 in. I.D., 2 lugs, 17/32 in. No. 206
leng by 3/16 in. wide. Term.
R-320 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 2000 ohms ± 5%, 8 watts, Potential divider for ES- 6 92615
WL T;;,;e
vitreous enamel insulatl.on, 1-1/2 in. long by screen biases 1-1 2 Z
5/16 in. O.D. by 5'/32 in. LD., 2 lugs, 17/32 in. No. 206
long by 3/16 in. wide. Term.
R- 321 RESISTOR Wire "Wound, 3000 ohms ± 5%, 8 watts, otentie.l divider for WL T;;,;e ES-6926 14
vitreous enamel insulation, 1-1/2 in. long by soreen biases 1-1 2 Z
5/16 in. O.D. by 5/32 in. LD., 2 lugs, 17/32 in. No. 206
long by 3/16 in. wide. Term.
R-322 RESISTOR: Wire wound} 7500 ohms' ± 5%, 10 watts, Potential d!.v1der for WL T;;J;e ES-692616
vitreous enamel imJ1Jlation, 1-3/4 in. long by screen biases 1-3 4 Z
5/16 in. O.D. by 5/32 in. I.D., 2 lugs, 17/)2 in. No 206
<
R- 323 RESISTOR: Corr.~o3ition, 18 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 watt, Spark s'.lppression at relay AB Type ES-692618
molded phenolic insulation; 3/8 in. long by contacts tn plate circuit EB-1801
9/64 in. die., leads No. 20 wire I in. long.
R-324 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 20 ohms ± 10%, carries 1/4 Plate circuit fuse Sprague 8044
amp. continu:::usly, 3/l~ in. long by 1/4 in. dia. S-11-l0
lead wires 1-1/2 in. long. Special.
R-3 2 6 RE5lS'l'OR: Same as R-324 Plate circuit fuse
R-327 RESISTOR: Composition, 3600 ohms ± 5%, 1 watt, Screen voltage divider AB 'l'ype B- 32753
molded phenolic insulation, 49/64 by 19/64 in. resistor GB- 3625
dia., leads No. 18 wire, 1 in. long.
R-3 28 RESISTOR: CO)';lp0s~t1on, 33,000 ohms ± 5iL 1 watt, Screen voltage divider AB.Type B- 32754
molded phenolic insulation 49/64 by 19/64 in. resistor GB-3335
dia, leads No. 18 wire, 1 in. long.
R-329 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 15,000 ohms ± )%, 15 watts, Audio freq. load resistor \oIL Ohmite
terminals t.ype B7, varnish coated, 5/8 in. dia. ;I>
'"....'"
m
R- 330
by 2 in. high term. 13/32 in. high. Z
o<XI ...'"'"
rn
RESISTOR: Comp'osition, 10 O['.111S ± 20%, 1 watt, AB Type ,
- a'"
Spark suppressor B- 34813
'"....r; 9/16 in. 10r~ by 7/32 in. dia. leads No. 18 Wire
1 in. long.
GB-1002
IRe Type o,
m
C
S-301 # SPRING: Formed spring, 0.010 in. phosphor bronze,
silver plate finish. Part of E-302
L-302 wiper contact, to
plate of V-301
BT-l
WECO Part of
E-30 2
-'" o
In
m
S-302 # SPRING: Similar to S-301, opposite hand. Part L-302 wiper contact, to WECO Part of
of E-302. C-304 E-302
S-303 # SPRING: Formed spring, 0.010 in. phosphor bronze, L-303 wiper contact, to 'dEeo Part of
silver plate finish. Part of E-304. plate of V-302 E-301!-
S- 304 # SPRING: Similar to 3-303, opposite hand. Part·of L-303 wiper contact, to WRCO Part of
E- 304. C-308 E-304
S-305 # SPRING: Formed spring, 0.010 in. phosphor bronze, L-305 wiper contact, to WECO Part of
s.ilver plate finish. Part of E-304. grid (unit No.2) of V-303 E-304
S-306 # SPRING: Similar to S-305, opposite hand. Part of L-305 wiper contact, to \.lEeO Part of
E-304. grid (unit No.1) of V-303 E-304
S-307 # SPRING: Formed spring, 0.010 in. phosphor bronze, L-308 wiper contact, to WECO Part of
silver plate finish. Part of E-302. plate (unit No.2) of E-302
V-3D")
iii g."
0
::l
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL AIRCRAF"I' RADIO EQUIPMENT AN/ARC-5
'" :s
MAJOR UNIT "RABrO TRANSMITTER T-23/ARC-S
ARMY STOCK NUMBER
REFERENCE NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION MFR.AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL ' BRITISH FUNCTION
REFERENCE NUMBEf DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
3-3 09 # SPRING: Formed 3prL~, 0.010 in. phosphor bronze, L-3l1 wiper contact, to WEco Part of
silver plate finish. Part of E-307. plate (unit No.1) of' E-307
V-304
3-308 # SPRING; Similar to 8-307, opposite hand. Part L-308 wiper contact, to WECO Part of
of E- 302. plate (unit No" 1) of V-?fJ3 E-302
s- 310 # SPRING: Similar to 3-309. Part of E-307. L-311 wiper contact, to WECO Part of
plate (unit No.2) of "E- 307
V-304
8-311 # CCNTACT SPRING; Formed contact shoe, 0.012 in. L-312 Wiper contact, to WECO
phosphor bronze, silver plate finish. grou.,-'"ld
8-312 # CONTACT SPRING: Similar to S-31l, insulated. C-323 contact, to antenna WECO part of
Part of E- 308. relay K- 301 E-30 8
8-313 SWITCH: 4-sectlon, double-make contact assembly; Crystal ut1it swt tching and WECO ES-693 157
cam operated, assembled as part of Z-302. chanI181 selection control
»
'"m'"-< 8-314 SPRING: Formed spring} 0.010 in. phosphor bronze,
silver plate finish. Part of Z-302.
Grolh"1ds and shorts unused
L-3l1, adjacent to the
WECO ES-695680 z
0 '"....
m
V>
coil in use"
'"....
I"'l s- 315 SPRING: Same as S-3l4. Grounds and shorts unused WECO '", '"
n
m L-311, adjacent to the 0, ....m
0::> coil in use. ..,<n 0::>
V-301 VACUUM TUBE: JAN-1625 (VT-136) beam tetrode Osc. and harmonic generator RC,<\ JAN-1625
Sylvania
V-3 02 VACUUM T0~E: Same as V-301 1st harmonic generator
v-303 VACUUM TL~E: JAN-832A (VT-286) vhf, push-pull beam 2nd harmonic generator RCA JAN-832A
power. Nat-Union
V-304 VACWJM TUBE: Same as V-30) R-F amplifier.
W-301 CONb~CTOR: Bead insulated, flexible Connector with To plate of V-301 WECO ES-693 218
grid clip No. 2313, assembled as part of Z-302,
2-5/8 in. long, exclusive of grid clip, 3/16 in.
d"ia.
W-302 CONNECTOR: Flexible connector, with grid cliy To plate of V-302 WECO ES-693251
No. 2513, assembled as part of Z-303. 1-1/2 in.
long exclusive of grid clip, 1/16 in. dia:
X-30l SOCKET: Large, 7-contact assembly, spun into Socket for vacuum tube WECO 5 06 8
chassis. 1-5/8 in. high by 2 in. dia. V-30l
X-30 2 SOCKET: Same as X-301 SOcket for vacuum tube
V-3 02
X-303 SOCKET: Socket assembly, includes by-pass Socket for vacuum tube WECO ES-6916l3
capaCitors for heater, screen and cathode and VT-286 used as 2nd h-g
plug P-303 for vacuum tube v-286, 4-5/8 by
2-518 by 2_1/2 in.
X-301+ SOCKET: Same as X-303, except includes P-304 Socket for vacuum tube
instead of P-303. VT-286 used as r-f amp.
X-3 06 SOCKET: Socket assembly, 1+ unit, 2-5/8 by 1-1/4 Receptacle far four Cinch Exp ES-691935
by 9/16 in. Crystal Units DC-30 No. 7355
Y-30 1 # CRYSTAL L'NIT DC-30: Quartz crystal, piezo-electric Frequency control Cbannel A WCO D-151430
oscilla tor.
Y_)02 » ,.m
'"
m
V>
-I Y-303
#
#
CRYSTAL UNIT: Same
CRYSTAL UNIT: . Same
"'
.,
Y-301, except for frequency.
Y-30L except for frequency.
Frequency control Channel B
Frequency control Channel C
Z
0 ...
V>
-
CO
'"n Y-301+ # CRYSTAL UNIT; Same ., Y-301, except for frequency. Frequency control Channel D •
0,
'"
n
...
-I
m
0
2-301 TURRET: Front turret assembly, less coils and
motor.
R-F amplifier tuning and
antenna coupling adjust-
WECO Es-69l706
-'" "'
CJ
o
-
o ....
Q
V>
<1>
'" !T
o·
n
~
B-IOIC CAP: Screw caD for brush holders B-IOIA and B-IOIB Retains brush in brush Oster
.(part of KS-S968 List 01 motor 8-101). holder Part No.
765
B- 2 50 MOTOR: Revers:!-ble, otherwise same as 3-101. Used Drives c:hannel selector Oster B-32427
with new selector 0-102 per D-151866. mechanism KS-5968,
List 02
B-250A BRUSH ASSR¥~LY: Positive, Stackpole grade Conducts current to Oster
LX-84-S (part of KS-5968 List; 02 'notal' B-250). armature Part No.
853
B- 2508 BRUSH ASSE)JI~LY: Negative, Stackpole grade Conducts current to Oster
LX-84-s (pa~t of KS-5968 List C2 motor B-250) armature Part No.
85 4
B-250C CAP: Screw cap for brush holders B-250A and Retains brush in brush Ost;er-
B-250B, (part of KS-5968 List; 02 motor B-250) holder Part No.
765
l>
...'"m
V>
C-I02 # CAPACITOR: Fixed, silvered mica button, 2000
± 100 ~~, 500 WVDC, has hole for ant;enna con-
R-F amp11fier grid by-pa.ss Erie Es-692952 Z
o0>
'"m
....
V>
V>
CONTRACT OR ORDER NO. NXsa-4000l PAGE 14 OF 70 PAGES ....
D
'ng:"
IT
oc.> m "
;;i
'"
-i V>
Q @
IT !l
;; O·
~
C-112 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-I02, except omlttL~g hole in R-F amp. plate circuit by- Erie ES-6g2952
terminal and assembled 8.S part of 2-102. pass
C-113 # CAPACITOR: Fixed, slIvered mica button, 500 MMF R-F amp. coupling to mixer Erie ES-6937S8
± 10%, 500 WVDC, assembled as part of Z-114.
c-114 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-112, except assembled as Mixer grid bias by-pass
part of Z-103.
C-115 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-103, except assembled as MiXer grid tuning trimmer
part of_Z_103.
C-116 # CAPACITOR: Fixed, ceramic, 2.0 ± 0.25 MMF, 500 t<lixer, grid tunir>..g pad Erie Type
WVDC, zero temperature coefficient 7/16 in. long NPOK
by 7/32 in. dla. leads 1 in. long, mineral was CENT
coated, part of Z-103. 932
0-122 #
te/ierature coefficient nee,. 80 ± 30 x 10- 1"0,
11 16 in. long by 7/32 in. dia. Part of z-104.
CAPACITOR: Same a, C-121. Part of z-104
parallels C-122
""'"
0
\
parallels C-12l
C- 12 3 CAPACITOR: Same ao C-118, except assembled ., Mixer plate circuit
part of z-104. by-pass
C-124 CAPACITOR: Same a, C-118, except assembled ao 1st i-f amp. grid by-pass
part of z-104.
C-1 25 # CAPACITOR: Same ao C-121, except assembled a, 1st i-f amp. grid tuning
part or Z-104. parallels C_126
C-126 # CAPACITOR: Same ao 0-121, except assembled ao 1st I-f amp. grid hming
part of z-104: parallels C-125
0-1 2 7 CAPACITOR: Fixed, molded mica, 6000 MMF, ± 20%, 1st i-f amp_ term. 3 CD B-34B11
300 WYnC, 53/64 by 53/64 by 11/32 in. thick (max.) cathode by-pass EL-MENOO
'WECO
C-128 CAPACITOR: Assembly of 3 units, each unit same as WECO
used in 0-117, 2 by 11/16 bY'SIB in.
o
'"
....
D
VI
tT
<;-
'"
Q.
C'
::!
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS '" ~
MODEL AIRf'RAF'" RADIO EQU'"PM"RNT
0 ~ .L",-", AN/ARC 5~
~', ' ~,
.~
C-128A CAPACITOR: Part of 0-128, same as 0-117A Ave control lead r-f by- WECO
pass
C-128B CAPAC~OR : Part of 0-128, same C-1l7A Squelch control lea.d r~f 'f,E:::O
"' by-pass
0-1280 CAPACr'rOR : Part of C-128, same C-1l7A Squelch control lead r~f "WECO
"' by-pass
.,
~
'".....
n 0-147 CAPACITOR: Same a, 0-144 Detector 'circuit by-pan '"0, n'"
-
a, , ....
m
"
0-148
0-1 4 9
CAPACITOR:
CAPACITOR:
Same c_118
Same as C-127
Squelch amp. grid filter,
first section with R-129
1st a-f amplifier, input
-
'"'" "
m
couplil:g
0-15(, CAPACITOR: Same as C-127 Detector cathode by-pass
C-151 CAPACITOR: Fixed, molded mica, 50 MMF ± 5%, 500 Ave diode res. by-pass
WVDC. 51/64 by 15/32 by 7/32 in. thick (max.)
0-15 8 CAPACI'l'OR:Fixed, silvered mica button, 2000 MMF Noise filter on term. 6 of' ES-::9 2 998
± 20%, 500 WVDC J-102 """"
0-159 CAPACITOR; Same as 0-158 Noise filter on term. 4 of
J-102
0-160 CAPACITOR: Same e, 0-158 Noise filter on term. 7 of
J-102
l>
'"....
m
In
0-161 CAPACITOR: Same ae 0-158 Noise filter on term, 2 of Z
'"
m
J-IC2 0 ....'"
'".....
i"i C-162 CAPACITOR: Seme a, 0-158 Noise filter on term. 3 of '"0, i"i'"
, ....
-'"
J-IC2
m
C m
C-163 CAPACITOR: Same C-151 Osc. grid coupling C
"'
0-164 OAPAOH'OR: Same ae 0-151 Osc. cathode coupling '"
C-165 CAPACITOR; Same a, 0-120 Osc. screen by-pass
0-166 # CAPACITOR: Same e' 0-111, except part of 2-107 Osc. plate circui t trimmer
C-167 # CAPACITOR: Same ae 0-112, except part of Z-107 Osc. plate circuit by-pass
0-168 CAPACITOR: Same ae C-120 COUPlin1 between osc. plate
~2-1C7 and 1st h-g grid
2-108
0-16 9 # CAPACITOR: Same ae 0-112, except part of Z-108 lst h-g grid circuit by-
pass
C-170 # CAPACITOR: Same 0-111, except part of z-108 let h-g grid circuit
" trimmer
C-I71 # CAPACITOR: Same e, 0-116, except part of z-108 lst h_g grid circu:!.t pad
'"
m 0-178 # CAPACITOR: Same as 0-176, except part of Z_110
h-g grid (Z-110)
2nd h-g grid circuit by-
l>
Z .,m
....
In
o '"....
'"o-, Ej.,
pass
'"
i'i
.... 0-179 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-l11, except part of Z_110 2nd h-g grid circuit
-.,..
trimmer
m m
0 c-180 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-116, except part of 2-110 2nd h-g g:r>id circui t pad o
0-181 # CAPACITOR: Same as c-l06 2nd h-g heater by-pass '"
c-182 CAPACITOR: Assembly of two capacitors WECO
C-182A CAPACITOR:' Part of 0-182, same as C-117A R-F filter plate Voltage
lead
C-182B CAPACITOR: Part of 0-182, same as C-117A R-F filter heater voltage
lead
c-183 # CAPACITOR: Same as 0-106 2nd h-g screen by-pass
0-184 CAPACITQH: Same as C-174, except part of 2-111 2nd h-g plate circuit pad
0- 18 5 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-lll, except part of 2-111 2nd h-g plate circuit
trimlIler
0-186 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-112, except part of 2-111 2nd h-g plate c~rcuttby-~
C-187 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-113, except part of 2-115 Plate voltage blocking
part of coupling betveen
2nd h-g plate and (2_112)
'"...
i'i 0-195 # CAPACITOR: Same as C-191 Noise filter on term. 4 of
J-I03 -••
o '"?'i
m
0 0-196 CAPACITOR: Fixed, dry electrolytic, 15 MF, m
2nd a-f amp. cath')de by- CD ES-692646 o
35 WVDC, 1-1/8 in. dia. by 1-3/8 in. high. pass Mallory
Sprague
0-197 CAPACITOR: Same as C-lS6 2nd i-f amp. cathode by-
pass
C-1g8 CAPACI'l'OR: Same as C-118 Squelch amp. grid filter
secone section with R-135
0-199 CAPACITOR: Same as 0_118 Motor nOise filter
0-200 CAPACITOR: Same as C_l18 !Motor no:l.se filter
0_201 CAPACITOR: Same as C-127 ~yc control lead i-f
by-pass
0-202 CAPACITOR: Same as 0-144 2nd a-f a~p. grid fidelity
shaping
0- 203 CAPACITOR: Same as C-127 lDetectnr heater by-pB.sS
0-251 CAPACITOR: Same as C-127 used with motor B-250 ~otor noise filter
0-250 # CAPACITOR: Silvered mica button, 500 MMF ± 10%, Motor nOise filter Erie
500 v. DC test, assembled with Motor B-250. Type 370
C-252 CAPACITOR: Same as C-127 used with motor B-250 Motor nOise filter
CR-I0l VARIS70R: Thyrite crystal voltage limiter, (See Protects T-lOl against WECO B-32846
R-168) 1-3/8 by 5/16 by 3/4 in., with leads no-load and surge D-167176
1-1/4 in. long, grey lacquer finish. potential
E-I0l TERMINAL: 5-circu1.t terminal assembly 7/8 by Terminates d-c circ;ults of j.,"S:::O
27/32 by 7/16 in. approx. r-f amp.
E-I02 TERMINAL: Same as E-10l Term~nates crystal 8ele~to~
relay "lnc.lngs and crystal
connection to v-l08
E-l04 CAP: Plug button, one used as part of each i-f Shielding and dust cover WEOO E3-6 92328
filter assembly Z-104, Z-105 and z-106.
1-5/32 in. dia. by 19/64 in. high l>
'".....
m
OJ'
E-IC5 SHIELD:
:z
'"In
m
, ....
One used as part of each i-f filter Shielding and dust cover WECO E3- 6 9:'9 43 0
-
assembly Z-104, Z-105 and Z-106,
'"
Q
CO
....m'"
n
-
E-I06 CLI?: Spring clip, one used with each X-lOl, Grounds base of tubes WECO E3_ 692026 0,
m X-I02, X-I09 and X-II0. 1.328 in. dia. by 3/4 in. JAN-71'(A (VT_26g) used as
0 high. V-IOI, V-I02·, V-I09 and 1:1
E-250
V-HO '"
....
TERMINAL ASSEMBLY: 13 terminals on strip. Support for terminals WECO B- 32257
2 supporting brackets. 4.0 by 1.0 br 7/8 in.
overall. (Part of selector D-l51866)
H-I01 WRENCH: For No.6 socket head cap screws For adjustment of selector WECO E3- 6 93794
cams, and squelch
sensitivity R-167
H-I02 CLAMP: Formed metal strip, c.p. 3/4 by 5/16 by Sec~res cable W-IOl WECO E3- 6 93778
0.031 in. against 0-101
H-IOj STUD Dynamotor mour.ting WECO E3-692085
H-I04 3TUD: Brass c.p. or z.p. 0.250 in. dia. by 0.219 DYnamotor orientation WECO 5480
in. high + 0.125 in. dia. by O.09~ in.
H-I05 CLAMP: Same as H-I02 Secures cable W-I01 in
2-113
H-I06 SPRING: DZUS "s" shaped spring Chassis side of right side DZUS E3-692845
cover fastening No. S3-150
H-I07 FASTENER: D2US fastener, oval head, bayonet Fastener on right sIde DZUS Es-69 2 36 3
dotted steel, 5/16 in. O.D. by 0.250 in. long cover- A-l03 No. A3- 25
nickel steel, c.p. or z.p.
H-lG8 SPRING: Single mounting for DZUS fasteners Used on right side cover WECO ES-692743
A-I03
}I-l09 SPRING: Dual mounting for DZUS fasteners Used on right side cover 'NECO Es-692741
A-I03
H-110 RIVET; 0.101 by 3/32 in, b.h. brass c.p. Secures H-lC8 and H-109 TRS ES-692847
to cover No. 2280
H-lll RIVET; Special head 0.218 in. dia. by 0.188 in. Centers receiver ·in rack ',.[SeQ Es-692744
high, shank C.I00 in. dia. by C.094 in. long, channels
corrosion resistant steel
H-1l2 RIVET: 0.e90 in. dial by 11/64 in. b.h. SeCUres H_lC6 to sides and TRS ES-6931 86
brass c.p. bottom covers No. 2281
H-ll') WASHER: 0.203 in. O.D. by C.C94 in. I.D. by Used between H-I06 and WECO ES-693 2l 3
»
'"m Z
...'"
0.020 in. C.R. steel c.p. upset 'end of H-1l2 m
....
'" 0 V>
'"
;:;
....
J-I01 SOCKET: Receptacle for coaxial cable WC-549
termination, assembled as part of W-I01, 1.G by
Antenna transmission line
connection
WECO
D-1 644 59
ES-695 8 93
, -'",, '"
;:;
....m
-
1.0 by 1-1/16 in. 0
m
0 J-I02 PLUG: 7-c9ntact receptacle assembly, spun in and 0
To receiver rack (power,
staked to chassis, 1-1/8 in. dia. by 1/2 in. high. audio and gajn control
circuits)
WECO 5488
'"
'"
J-I03 RECEPTACLE: 6-contact receptacle assembly, To radio control box WECO 5577
1-5/16 in. dial by 3/4 in. (cp~nnel selection and
antenna relay control Cir-
cuits)
J-lGlJ- RECEPTACLE: 3-contact receptacle assembly. To dynamotor *DY-2/ARR-2 WECO 4718
1-3/16 in. dial by QIl6 in. high.
K-IOl RELAy: Single make contacts, coil resistance 300 Crystal unit connection WECO ES-692094
ohms ± 10%. 18 volts applied to coil must draw for- Channel A
armature into contact with pole face, 1-5/8 by
1-5/16 by 3/4 in.
K-IOIA CONTACT ASSEMBLY: Riveted assembly of contact Replacement unit for con- WECO ES-69 2106
and insulator parts. 1-1/16 by 3/4 by 3/8 in. tacts of K-IOl
K-102 RELAy: Same as K-IOI Crystal unit connection
for Channel B.
K-IOS
Channel C '"
'"
RELAY: Same as X-lOS Selector control for
Channel D
K- 2 5° RELAY ASSE!>1BLY: One set of transfer contacts on Motor control relay CLARE B-32442
the right side,- and one set of transfer contacts Type K
and one set of break contacts, on left side.
Coil resistance 270 ohms to 330 ohms, contact
clearance 0.015 to 0.025, contact pressure 30
grams, --contacts are No. 14GA palladium. 1-1/2 by
1-1/4 by 1 in. Used with Selector 0-102.
L-IOI # INDUCTOR: Air core, 2 turns at 12 turns per inch, Input tunir..g WECO ES-693924
0.234 I.D. silver plated copper wire 0.C50 in.
dia., assembled as part of Z-lOl.
L-I02 # INDUCTOR: Air core, 2_1/2 turns at 12 turns per R-F interstage coupling WECO ES-691914
inch, 0.188 in. I.D. 3ilver plated copper wire
0.050 in. dis. Assembled as part of Z-lD2.
L-I03 # IJ'i!I;DCTOR; Air 'Core, 3 tUrns at 12 turns per inch, R-F interstage coupling
0.188 in. I.D-. silver pIa ted copper wire G. G50 in.
dia. Assembled as part of 2-103.
L-I04 # INDUCTOR; Air core, 6-1/2 turns 0.201 in. I.D. R-F interstage coupling WECO
sil~er plated copper wire C.050 in. dia. used with C-113
Assembled as part of 2-114.
L-I05 # I~~UCTOR ASSEMBLY: Slug t~~ed coil (bottom plate 1st i-f band pass WECO
and coil assembl:r) Coil has 33-3/1; turns ~Jf No.
26 wire (coil form 1-3/16 in. high by 3/8 in.
O.D.). Part of 2-104.
L-l06 # INDUCTOR ASSEMbLY: Slug tuned coil (top plate and 1st i-f band pass WECO Es-692735
coil assembly) Coil has 33-3/4 turns or No. 29
Wire, coil rorm 1-3/16 in. high by 3/8 in. O.D.
Part of 2-104.
L-I07 # INDUCTOR ASSE~J3LY: Same ae L-105· Part of 2-105. 2nd i-f baEd pass
l>
...'"m
'"
L-I08 # INDUCTOR ASSE:¥.BLY: Same aa L-I06. Part of 2-105· 2nd 1-f baEd pass Z
0
'"'"m
L- 10 9 #
-- '"n
n-mUCTOR ASSEl'iliLY: Same ae L-I05· Part of 2-106. 2nd 1-f band pass -t
'"....
r; ,
CO
L-110 # INDUCTOR ASSEMBLY: Same ea L-I06.
m
Part of 2-106. 2nd i-f band pass 0, ....
m
0 L-111 # COIL: Air core, 22 turns of No. 28 D.C. wire, Interstage coupling WECO ES-6 9205 2 0
close wound. 15/32 in. dia. by 15/16 in. high.
Part of Z-107. '"'"
L-112 # COIL: Same as 1-111. Part of z-108 Interstage coupling
L<-1l3 # COIL: Air core, 7 turns at 14 turns per inch, Part of trimmer unit 2 "09 t.r«"O ES-69191 2
0.312 in. I.D. silver plated copper wire. C.050
in. dia. Assembled as part of Z-109.
L-114 # COIL: Air core, one' turn (open), 0.160 in. I.D.
silver plated copper wire. 0.050 in. dia.
Part of t-'-oor =1t Z-:091,,,00
Assembled as part of Z-109.
L- 11 5 # COIL: Same as L-ll}. Assembled as part of 2-110. Part of tr~~~er unit 2-110
L-116 # COIL: Same as L-l14. Part of 2-110.
L-117 # COIL: Air core, 3 turns at 12 turns per inch, Inter stage coupling WECO ES-691913
0.201 in. I.D., Silver plated copper wire.
0.050 in. dia. assembled as part of Z-111.
L-118 # COIL: Air core, 3 turns at 12 turns per inch, lnterstage coup.llng WECO 1<:3-696667
0.211 in. I.D., silver plated copper wire 0.050
in. dia., asse;rJ;led as part of Z-112.
L-1l9 # COIL: Air core, 3-1/2 turns, 0.320 in. to 0.201 in. Output h-g coupl~ng used WECG ES-693890
I.D., silver plated copper wire. 0.050 in. dia., With 2-118
assembled as part of 2-115.
L-120 CHOKE COIL: Retardation call, d-o resistance 288- H-V -:;hoke WECO
363 ohms, inductance 3.0 henrys at 60 cyoles with
3V AC across winding and 50 milliamperes DC
through coil. 1-11/16 in. dia. by 1-15/16 in.
high.
CHOKE COIL: Retardation coil, d-c resistance L-V choke WECO 554-6
0.1126 ohms ± 10%. Ind. 0,100 mh ± 10% at
60 cycles. 1-1/16 in. din. by 1-5/32 in. high.
SELECTOR; Assembled drive for C-105 includes Channel selecting WECO l>
B-IOl, K-IOS to K-108 inclusive, and R-167, Used mechanism
in Radio Receivers per D-lS1857 and D-lS1926. Z
oex>
'"m
SELECTOR: Assembled drive for C-105. Includes Channel selecting WE"'" B-33697 , '"-<
B-250, K-250, and R-250. Used in Radio Receivers
per D-152015 and D-1520l6.
mechnnism D~15.l866 '"....
n
m
GEAR; Double split gear and hub, assembled as Drives gear 0-104 from WECO C
part of Selector 0-101, includes two speed gears selector cam shaft; driven
1.792 in. O.D. 84 teeth, 48 pitch brass, one with manually by 0-106
shaft dia. 0.562 in. and one with 0.343 in.
shaft dia.
0-104 GEAR; Gear and hub assembly, assembled as part of Operates 3-section part of lIECO
C-105. Gear has 84 teeth, 48 pitch, 1.791 in. capacitor C-105 from gear
O.D. 1.750 in. P.D. 1/8 in. thick. Hub 9/16 in. 0-103
O.D. by 0.239 in. I.D. by 0.225 in. thick, set
screw .138-32.
0-105 GEAR: Split gear and hub assembly, assembled as Operates 6-sectien part of WECO ES-693872
part of 0-105 shaft, dia. 0.239 in. includes one capacitor ~-l05 from gear
gear 84 teeth, 48 pitch 1.791 in. O.D., 1.750 in. 0-104
P.D. brass, hard temper. One gear 84 teeth,
48 pitch, 1.791 in. C.D., 0.500 I.D. Hub 9/16 in.
O.D., 0.239 in. I.D., 0.376 in. thick, set screy
.138-32.
0-106 DIAL AND GEAR ASSEMBLY: Scale, gear, bearing and Frequency calibration and 'l/E.CO
mounting. manual operation of
selector 0-101
0-252 GEAR ASSEMBLY: Same as 0-103 except used with Drives gear 0-104
new selector 0-102 (D-15l866)
0-253 DIAL AND GEt~9 ASSEMBLY: Scale gear, bearing and Frequency calibration and
mounting same as 0-106 except used with new manual operation of
selector 0-102 (~151866) Selector 0-102
R-IOI # RESISTOR: Composition, 100,000 ohms ± 20%, 1/2 R-F amp. grid filter AB Type
watt, molded phenolic insulation. 3/8 in. ;tong EB-1042
by 9/64 in. dia., 0.766 in. between lead end Erie
centers. No. 524
R-I02 RE.'3ISTOR; Composition, 220 Ofu""lS ± 10%, 1/2 watt, R-F amp. cathode decoupler AB Type ES-691921
molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by and bias EB-2211
9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
R-IO} RESISTOR: Composition, 39,000 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, R-F amp. screen decoupler AB Type ES-69 2 299
molded phenolic insulation, 49/64 in. long by and volt drop GB-3931
19/64 in. dia., leads No. 18 wire I in. long. :I>
'" :z m
m
'"-<
...i'i'"
R-I04 RESISTOR: 'Composition, 12 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 watt,
molded phenolic insulation, 3/8- in. long by
9/64 in. dia., leads No, 2C wire 1 in. long.
R-F amp. oscillation sup_
pressor
AB Type
EB-1201
ES-69'2321 .- n'"
0 '"
, ....
'"
0, ....
m
<:>
R-I05 # RESISTOR: Composition, 10,000 ohms ± 10%, 1/2
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long
R-F amp. plate filter AB Type
EB-I031
Es-69)923
-
'"
In
m
0
R-lll RESISTOR: Composition, 5600 or~3 ± 10%, 1 watt, Mixer plate filter AB TYjOe
molded phenolic insulation, 49/64 in. long, G8-5621
19/64 in. dis., leads 1 in. long
R-1l2 RESISTOR: Composition, 4.7 megohms ± 10%, 1/2 1st i-f amp. grid filter AJ3 Type Es-692)04
watt, mo::'ded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long, and voltage diVider EB-4751
9/64 in. die., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
R- 11 3 RESISTOR: Composition,. 1.8 megohms ± 10%. 1/2 watt, 1st i-f amp. grid AVC AB Tille Es-69230)
molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by voltage divider EB-l 51
9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
R-1l4 REsrSTOR: Composition, 1000 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, 1st filament circuit AB Type ES-692287
molded phenolic insulation, 49/64 In. long, padding GB-I021
19/64 in. dia., leads No. 18 wire 1 in. long.
»
'"m R-1l5 RESISTOR: Same as R-114 1st filament circuit Z
'"'"....
m
....
'" paddir..g 0
'";:;.... R-1l6 RESISTOR: Same as R-I02 1st i-f amp. cathode ""-• n'"
-'"• 0...
decoupler and bias 0
m m
0 R-1l7 ~ESISTOR: Same as R-IO) 1st I-f amp. screen VD
and decoupler
R-1l8 RESISTOR: Comnosition, 270,000 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, Gain control bleeder A8 Type ES-693 84 9
'"
molded phenoilC insulation, 49/64 in. long by G8-2741
19/64 in: dis., leads No. 18 wire, 1 in. long.
R-119 RESISTOR: Composition, 1000 ohms ± 2Q%, 1/2 watt, 1st i-f amp. plate filter AB Type
molded phenolic lnsulation, 3/8 in. long by EB-I022
9/611 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire, 1 in. long •
.
R-120 RESISTOR: Composition, 560,000 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 Ave filter, r-f amp. + AB Type E3- 6 95586
watt, molded 'phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by 1st i-f amp. EB-5641
9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire, 1 in. long.
R-121 RESISTOR: Composition, 100 ohms ± 20%, 1/2 watt, R-F mixer; i-f amp. screen AB Type
molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by supply VD E8-1012
9/64 in. dis., leads No 20 wire 1 in. long.
o
R-125 RESISTOR: Composition, 3900 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, Same as R-124 AB Type ES-695364
molded phenolic insulation, 49/64 1.n. long by GB-3921
19/64 in. dla., leads No. 18 wire 1 in. long.
R-126 RESIS~OR: Composition, 27,000 ohms ± 10%, 2nd i-i' amp. screen de- AB Type ES- 6 92297
1 watt, molded phenolic insulat1.on, 49/64 in. coupler and VD GB-2731
long by 19/64 in. dia., leads No. 18 wire,
1 in. long.
R-127 RESISTOR: Same as R-119 2nd i-f a.mp. p1a.te filter
R-128 RESISTOR: Composition, 10,000 ohms ± 20%, 1/2 watt, Detector diode filter AB Type ES-695584 >
...'"'"
molded phenolic insulation 3/8 in. long by
m
9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire, 1 in. long.
EB-I03 2 Z
....'"m
, '"
0
'"
;:;
....
m
0
R-129 RESISTOR: Composition, 1.0 megohm ± 20%,
1/2 watv, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in.
long by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire
Squelch grid tune, con-
stant filter
AB Type
EB-I052
ES- 6 95587 --,
CO
0
-0
1l'"
m
0
I in. long.
R-130 RESISTOR: Composition, 180,000 or~s ± 10%, Detector diode load AB Till" ES- 6 919 27
'"
1/2 watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. EB-l 41
long by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire
1 1.n. long.
R-131 RESISTOR: Composition, 2200 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 Detector diode measur1.r~ AS Type Es-692290
watt. molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long EB-2221
by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
R-132 RESISTOR: Ccmposit1.on. 560,000 ohms ± 10%', 1/2 AVC delay bias voltage AB Type
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in, long divider EB-5641
by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
R-133 RESISTOR: Composition, 15,000 ohms f 10%, 1/2 AVC delay bias voltage AB Type
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long divider. EB-1531
by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 w1.re I in. long. AVC and squelch
R-134 RESISTOR: Composition. 68,000 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 AVC 11mi ter AB Type ES-695366
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long EB-6831
by 9/64 in. dia., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long
...'"
n R-140
R-141
RESISTOR:
RESISTOR:
Same as R-l)O
Same as R-129
1st a-f amp. grid
Squelch plate
'"?j
m m
o R-142
o
RESISTOR: Composition, 3300 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 watt, 1st a-f amp. cathode bias AB Type ES-692293
molded phenolic insulation, )/8 in. long by EB-3321
9/64 in., leads No. 20 wire 1 in. long.
R-145 RESISTOR: Composition, 1500 op~s ± 10%. 1 watt, Output 1st a-f amp. cathoce AB Type
molded phenolic insulation, 49/64 in. long by GB-1521
19.64 in. dia., leads No. 18 wire 1 in. long.
0 '"('i....
m
C No. 524 m
C
R- 158 # RESISTOR: Composition, 22,000 ohms ± 10:%, 1/2
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long
1st h-g plate filter AB Type
EB-2231
ES-692721 '"'"
by 9/64 in. dia, Erie
No. 524
R- 1 59 # RESISTOR: Composition, 560,000 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 2nd h-g grid filter AB Type ES-692724
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long by EB-5621
.,
9/64 In. dis. Erie
No. 524
R-160 # RESISTOR: Some R-108 2nd h-g grid measuring
R-161 RESISTOR: S~e ., R-155 2nd h-g screen
R-162 RESISTOR: Same ., R-I04 2nd h-g OSc. suppressor
ij-163 # RESISTOR: Same ., R-157 2nd h-g plate filter
R-164 # RESISTOR: Same ., R-158 2nd h-g plate filter
R-165 # RESISTOR: Composition, 180,000 ohms ± 10%, 1/2 Mixer grid res. AB Type
watt, molded phenolic insulation, 3/8 in. long EB-18'H
by 9/64 in. dia. rie
No. 524
3-251 SWITCH ASSEMBLY: I-section stator and rotor, 11<'01" channel selection OAK B-32215
5/64 in. thick, phenol fibre stator shall be
standard Oak lO-point, rotor. Blades and contacts
shall be silver.
5-252 SWITCH ASSEMBLY: I-section similar to S-251 with or protection against OAK B- 34183
difrerent contact arrangement. motor runaway
8-253 SWITCH ASSEMBLY: I-section. Similar to S-251 with Crystal relay selecting OAK B-34184
different contact arrangement. switch
T-110 Transformer: Primary terminals 1-2, 4000 turns Output transformer WECO Es-692327
No. 40 AWG enameled wire 1028 to 1300 ohms d-c
resistance. Secondary terminals 3 - case,
1800 turns No. 38 AWG enameled wire 292 to 370
ohms d-c resistance. Secondary tap 6 to case,
1325 turns 86 to 110 ohms d-c resistance.
Primary inductance: Min. 20 henrys at 400 cycles
with 10 milliamperes d-c flowing through primary
and with secondary open. Insulation between
primary 'Winding and case shall withstand 1000 V.
DC for 5 seconds. 1-5/8 in. dia. by 1-3/4 in.
high overall case dimensions.
V-IOI VACUUM TUBE: JAN-717A ('\1'1'-269) VHF penta de R-F amplifier WECO JAN-717A
amplifier. Tungsol
VACUUM TUBE: Same as V-IOI Mixer
V-I03 VACUUM TUBE: JAN-12SH7 (V'I'-288) H-F pentode 1st i-f amplifier RCA JAN-12SH7
amplifier.
v-l04 VAC~:M TUBE: Same a~ V-I03 2nd i-f amplifier
V-I05 VACUUM Tv3E: JAN-12SL7GT (VT-289) Twin triode DET-Ave RCA JAN-12SI. 70T
amplifier.
V-Io6 VACUUM TUBE: Same as V-I05 1st B_f amplifier
V-107 VACUUM Tl~E: JAN-12A6 or JAN_12A6GT (VT-l34) Beam 2nd a-f amplifier RCA JAN-12A6 or
tetrode audio power amplifier. JAN-12A6GT
v-lo8 VAClJUM Tl.'BE: Same e, V-I03 . Osc.
V-109 VACUUM TUBE: Same e, V-IOI ht harmon!:: generator
:I>
'"m Z
'"m~
...
V>
V-110 VAGUU~ TUBE: Same
"' V-IOI 2nd harmonic generator g,
'"
1'i
-t
m
W-IOI CABLE: Coaxial
J-IOI coaxial
3/8 in. G.D.
transmission line assembly including
conductor. 3-3/16 in. long by
One end supported by bracket.
Ante~~a circuit connection
from J-IOI to C-IOI
WECO
-
o
..,
~
a'"
m
C Other end has J_IOI attached. C
VI
X-IOI to SOCKET: Octal_base tube socket Used for all tubes in Amphenol
X-110 receiver s-8 modi-
incl. Note - Socket per drawing 6559 can be used as fied
emergency replacement by bending soldering Cinch
terminals to suit viring.
SOCKET: Dual sockets Mounting for two (each) Amphenol ES-695336
crystal units DC-31, Special
Y-IOI and Y-I02
SOCKET: Same as X-Ill Mounting for two crystal
Units DC-31, Y-I03 and
Note - Either socket per drawing ESL-692852 or Y-IG4
6559 can be used as emergency replacement,
if term.inals 1 and 3 are used for one
crystal unit, and terminal 5 and 7 are used
for the other.
Y-I01 CRYSTAL UNIT: Crystal unit DC-31, quartz crystal Oso. freq. cOntrol for WECO D-15l431
oscillator. channel A DC-31
Y-I02 CRYSTAL UNIT: Same as Y-lOl Osc. freq. control for
chan.."lel B
Y-103 ~~YSTAL UNIT: Same as Y-lOl Osc. freq. cOntrol for
channel C
Y-lo4 CRYSTAL UNIT: Same as Y-IOI Osc. freq. control for
channel D
2-101 UNIT: Assembly of 0-102, 0-10), 0-104,
TRI~ililliR R-F input circuit tuning WECO ES-69190'7
L-IOI and R-IOI
2-102 TRI~~ UNIT: Assembly of C-l10, 0-111, 0-112, R-F amp. plate tunip~ WECO Es-691908
L-I02, R-I05 and R-I06.
2-105 TRIYu~ UNIT: Assembly of 0-114, 0-115, 0-116, Mixer grid tuning
'"
m L-I03, R-107 and R-IOB.
WECO ES-691909
» ,.
:z m
....V> 2-104 FILTER: Assembly of 0-121, 0-122, 0-123, C-124,
....
1st i-f amp. tuning WECO Es-69 2S32
'"
'"0, ,.i'i
0
...'" -- ...
C-125, 0-126, L-I05, L-I06, R-ll1, R-112 and
i'i R-ll3 (red dot on shield).
m 2-105 FILTER: Assembly of 0-132, C-133, C-134, 0-135, 2nd i-f amp. tuning WECO Es-692533 , m
.0
0-136, 0-137, L-I07, L-l08, R-119 and R-122 0
(yellow dot on shield). '"'"
2-106 FILTER: Assembly of 0-141, 0-142, 0-143, C-144,- 3rd i-f amp. tuning WECO ES-69 2 53 4
0-145, 0-146, L-IC9, L-II0, R-127 and R-128
(Blue dot on shield).
2-107 TRIMMER UNIT: Assembly of 0-166, 0-167, L-lll Oscillator plate tuning to WECO ES-691901
and R-152. 4th harmonic of crystal
2-108 TRI~~ UNIT: Assembly of 0-169, 0-170, 0-171, TripIer grid tuning to WECO Es-691902
L-112, R-l?3 and R-154. 4th harmonic of crystal
2-109 TRIMMER UNIT; Assembly of C-174, 0-175. C-176, TripleI' plate tuning to VECO ES-6919C3
L-l13, L-114, R-157 and R-ISB. 12th harmonic of crystal
2-110 TRI~~ER v~IT: Assembly of 0-178, 0-179. 0-180, Doubler grid tuning to 12th WECO ES-691904
L-115, L-116, R-159 and R-160. harmonic of crystal
2-111 TRIMMER UNIT: Assembl~ of 0-184, 0-185, 0-186, Doubler plate tuning to WECO ES-691905
L-117, R-163 and R-164. 24th harmonic of orystal
Z-112 TR~~ UNIT: A3sembl¥ of 0-188, c-189, C-190, Harmonic generator output WECO Es-6919C6
L-118, R-165 and R-166. tuning to 24th harmonic
of crystal
Z-113 TUNING UNIT: Complete assembly of C-I05. E-IOl, Replacement assembly of WECO Es-691900
W-IOl, X-IOI, x-lOB, X-109, X-IIO, Z-101, Z-102, complete r-f and h-g
2-10), Z-107, z-108, Z-109, Z-110, Z-111, Z-112, assemblies
Z-114, Z-115.
Z-114 COUPLING UNIT: Assembly of C-113 and L-I04 R-F amplifier coupllr~ to WECO
mixer between Z-102 and
Z-103
Z-115 COUPLING UNI'l': Assembly of 0-187 and L-1l9 2nd h-g filter coupling 'lIEeo
between 2-111 and 2-112
l>
'"....m'" Z
oCO '"m~
,
'".....
n - a'"
o,
m
" -...
U1
m
"
'"....
n BUTTON Thomson 5172 -,
o, ?:i'"m
m
<:7
J-401
WASHER: 2 req'd.
460 to CONTROL UNIT C-42/P-.RC-5: Electrical and mechanical Controls Radio Receiver WECO
46 9 equivalent to the VHF (right-hand) section of R-28/ARC-S D-151806 B-33131
series Control Unit C-43/ARC-S. D-151928 B- 35207
C-460 CAPACITOR: Dry electrolytic, 3 MF 300 WVDC, Audi~ filter capacitor CD ES-692651
3/4 in. dia. by 1- 3/4 in. high. 1<\[,1:'0:"]
Sprague
E-460 LEVER: Switct, aluminQ~ alloy, black enamel For A-B and AVC-MVC switch WECO
finish. 21/32 by 318 by 3/8 in. overall, approx.
E-46l KNOB: Molded black bakelite No. 14316, stamped For volQ~e control WECO
"INCREASE OG""I'PlJT" with directional arrow. 0.671
in. dia. by 0.531 in. high, 250 in. dia. mtg.
hole, 6-32 set screw.
H-460 SNAPSLIDE: Formed, comprises Fastener
SNAP SLIDE Scoville 2540
GUIDE Patton 4750 »-
'"....
m
V> BU1'TON Thom3cn 5172
:z
0 '"....
m
V>
'"
i'i
-t
m J-460
WASHER:
RECEPTACLE:
2 req'd.
'" J-461 JACK: 9/16 in. dia. by 1-S/16 in. overall. A TEL WECO 4-691 '"'"
OJ
R-461 RESISTOR; Composition, 820 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, For volume control AB Type ES- 6 96 707
molded phenolic insulation, 7/32 in. dia. by network GB-8211
9/10 in. long, leads !'to. 18 wire 1_1/2 long.
R~462 RESISTOR: Compos~tionJ 22CO ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, For volume contro] AB Type
molded phenolic insulation, 7/32 in. dia. by network GB-2221
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 long.
RESISTOR: Composition, 68 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, For volume control AB T",e ES- 6 96 709
molded phenolic insulation, 7/32 in. dla. by network GB-6801
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1~1/2 in. long.
R-464 RESISTOR: Composition, 180 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, For volume control network AB Type Es-6g6710
molded Phenolic ins·u1ation, 7/32 in. dia. by GB-1811
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 in. long
S~460 SWITCH: (A-OFF-B) Single current, 3-position A TEL - B TEL SWitching WECO 6540
8_461 ST;[ITCH: (MVC-OFF-AVC) Multiple circuit, 3-positlon MVC-OFF-AVC SWitching WECO ES-6922l0 ;!>
...'"'" '"
m 3-462 SWITCH: Contacts single pole, normally closed. ON-OFF switchir~ of re- , GE No. Es-692306 Z
Gap 0.020 in., 24 v, 10 amp., molded plastiC ceiver filaments and CR-lD{'OCl03 0 '"
II>
-0
-'" n...'"
housing, 1-3/lt by 19132 by 112 in. overall. dynamotor
'"
~
•
0
m !. m
" o(j
'"
C
'"iD 'o·"
!l-
410 to CONTROL UNIT C-43/ARC-S Controls two Radio Re- WECO B-3309°
419 ceivers R_20 to R-27/ARC-5 D-15l807
series and one Radio Receiver
R -28/ARC-S (excepting
char~el selection)
{See Control Unit
C-30/ARC-5}
c-410 CAPACITOR: Dry electrolytic 3 MF", 300 'WVDC, Audio filter capacitor I CD ES- 692651
3/4 in. die. by 1-314 in. high. Mallory
Sprague
E-410 LEVER: Switch, aluminum alloy, black enamel Lever for A-B, CW-MCW, WECO 5444
finish. 21132 by 318 by 3/8 in. overall. and AVC-MVC switches
E-411 KNOB: Stamped !'INCREASE OUTP"(iT" with directional For gain or volume control WECO Es-6g0538
arrow. Molded black bakelite No. 14316. 0.671
in. dia. by 0.531 in. high, 0.250 in. dia.
mounting hole. 6-32 set screw.
E-412 CRANK: Knob 21/32 in. dia. by 17/32 in. high, Fo~ remote tuning w'ECO l>
'"m with crank 1-1/4 by 1-1/8 by 5/8 in. overall
7955
Z
~ approx.
o
a'"
m
1:7
H-410 SNAPSLIDE:
SNAP SLIDE
Formed, comprises Fastener
Scoville
--
'",
o,
GUIDE
BLTI'ON
Patton 4750 '"'"
Thomson 5172
WASHER: (2 req'd.) Wallace 5171
J-410 RECEPTACLE; 8 contact, equivalent to ARC No. 6418, To receiver rack WECO 6418
with nut No. 5131.
J-411 RECEPTACLE; Same 8S J-4l0 To receiver rack .
J-417 RECEPTACLE: 2 contact, 7/8 in. dia.;by 13/16 in. To receiver rack for side- WE:;O 2674
hlgh. tone injection
0-410 GEARING UNIT For remote tuning WECO 6550
0-411 SLEEVE: Aluminum alloy _ no finish 0.687 In. O.D., Fastening for tuning WECO 6397
0.380 I.D. by 9/16 in. lang approx. 0.594 in. shaft
dist. between 2 mtg. holes. 1/2 - 27 U.S.
thread.
0-412 NUT: Hex., brass, cad. plated, 11/16 in. on side Fastens sleeve to chassis WECO 1285
by 1116 in. thick.
0-413 SPLINE: Part of 0_1~lO assembly Connects with tuning WECO 6403
shaft MC-2l5
SET SCREW; 6-32 by 5/32 in, Bristo, cup point, Secures spline (O-413) to 'rffiCO 4140
steel, blued. shaft of 0 .. 410 asseI:1b~,y
,.,
m
0-415 GFAR: Bevel, 18 teeth, 48 pitch, made from
Eost.on Gear No. G-461, or equivalent 0.312 in.
Tuning shaft drive WECO 6392 »
Z
,.,
'"
..... dia. by 0.406 in. high, 2 used in 0-410. 0 '"...'"
'"....
;:; 0-416 GROOV-PIN: Type .1, 3/64 by 5/16 in. steel,
<,,.p., 2 used in 0-410.
Secures bevel gears to
shafts
GROOV
Type 1
6012 ""-, n
'"....
, m
- 1:1
0
m
1:1 PO'fENTIOMETER' Composition, 0-50,000 ohms ± 20%, Ga,in control for Rad:!.o AB 6488
3000 useful rotation. Cover and face plates,
monel; shaft and other steel parts, 18-8 stain_
less. Brass parts nickel 81ated, 1-1/16 in.
Receivers R-20 to
R- 2 7/ARC-5
Type J
'"'"
dia. by 1-17/32 in-. high. Shaft 0.250 in. dia.
by 5/16 in. long, includes 3/6-32 threaded
section.
R-4n POTENTIOMETER: Same as R-41G VolUme control
R-412 POTENTIOMETER: Composition, 3-sectlon, each ra~ed Control for Radio Receiver AB ES-6g4799
at 2 watts. Useful rotation of shaft 313~ R-28/ARC-5 Type JJJ
Corrosion resistant, 11/16 in. dia. by 2-15/16 in.
long. Shaft C.25C in. dia., 7132 in. long, 1/4
in. bushing, 3/8-32 thread.
R-412A Part of R-412: Panel Section, term. 1 and 2. Gain control
5C,000 ohms ± 20%.
R-412B Part of R-412: Middle Section, te1'm. ), 4, 5 and 6. High i:rrpedance vol\:z-,e
6c,000 ohms ± 20%. control
R-412C Part of R-412: Rear Section, term. 7, 8, 9, le. Low impedance volume
4,600 ohms ± 2($ '. control
.... o·'"Q,
CONTRA_CT OR ORDER NO. NXea-40001 PAGE 40 OF 70 PAGES <>
";;-tT "
<n ;;a
w ....a
o <r
iii
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS '"
MODEL AIRCRAFT RADIO EQUIPMENT AN/ARC-5 MAJOR UNIT COilTROL UNIT c-43/ARC-S
ARMy STOCK NUMBER
REFERENCE NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,ANO DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEF DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
RESISTOR: Composition, 820 oluns ± 10,t, 1 watt, For volume control netv0::,k AS Tg?e Es-696707
molded phenolic insulation, "{ /32 in. dill.. by GB- 211
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 in. long.
R-414 REsISTOR: Composition, 2200 ohms ± 10,t, 1 watt, For volume control network AB Type ES-C9/S'108
molded phenolic inslJ.1ation, 7/32 in. dla. by GB-2221
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 in. long.
R-415 RESISTOR: Comp::::sltion, 68 ohms ± 1C%, I watt, For voltnne contI'':>l network AB Type ES-69670 g
molded phenolic insulation, 7/32 in. dla. by OB-6801
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 in. long.
R-416 RESISTOR: Composition, 180 ohms ± 10%, 1 watt, For volume coon tr:>l network AB Type ES-696 '710
molded phenolic insulation, 7/32 in. dla. by GB-1811
9/16 in. long, leads No. 18 wire 1-1/2 in. long.
S-41C SWITCH: (A-OFF-B) 1-1/16 in. dia. by 1-)/8 in. A TEL - B TEL switching WECO 654C
long.
8-411 SWITCIL (CW-O~'F-MCW) 1-1/16 in. dla. by 1-3/8 in. CW-OPF-MCW 8wl tc:t:L;:lg ~rEC:: 6536 l>
'"
m
'".....
long. Z
'"m
8-412 SWITCH: Same as S-410 A TEL - B TEL switching 0
, '"
-I
'"B -
OJ
S-413 SWITCH: Same as 8-411 CW-OFF-MCW switChing 0, '"....
;::;
...'"-
m
o 8-414 SWITCH: Same as S-410 m
A TEL - B TEL !OJ"W1 tchir:g 0
8-415 S'WITCH: (MVC-OFF-AVC) ~-1/16 in. dia. by 1-3/8 in. MVC-OFF_AVC swi tchir.g ~rK:;Q ES-692210
long appr8X.
3-416 SWITCH; Contacts single pole, normally closed, ON-OFF sv1 tcr:inS GE No. ES-692306
gap 0.020 in, 24 V, 10 amp., molded bakelite CR-Jr7CC-I03
housing, 1-3/4 by 19/32 by 1/2 in. overa:Cl.
-,
A-8S-A, TS-78/u in cardboard container. CO
...'" '"
Type 313
i'i i'i
m
0, ....
m
1:1 INDICATOR I-106-A -0 1:1
# RADIATION INDICATOR: Assembly. Includes items VHF field strength and WECO Es-69 4514
'"
A-620 to N-620, inclusive, below. freq. indicator D-150731
A-620 TIP: Soft black rubber tip, 25/32 O.D. by 7/64 in. Mounting and shock Masback ES-693124
I.D. with 9/32 in. recess, 3/16 in. deepo absorber Type 137
A-621 # MOUNTING: Pivoted mounting for antenna, phosphor M01.L.'1ting for antenna Ward ES-69 4937
bronze, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 by '(/8 in. E-620 Type BLA
0-620 CAPACITO:!'l: Variable a1r, 4,5-18 MMF, 3 plates. Tunes circuit Bud ES-694373
2-1/2 by 1-3/4 by 1-)/8 in< Zero temperature Mod_ Type
coefficient. MC-1850
0-621 CAPACITOR: SlIvered ceramic, 1,0 ± 0.25 MMF, Tunes circuit Erie ES-692523
500 WVDC, 7/52 in. dia. by 7/16 in. long. Leads Type NPOK
No. 20 wire, 1 in. long.
OR-620 SILICON RECTIFIER: Crystal rectifier, 9/32 in, RectlC1es VHF to operate
dia.. by 27/)2 in, long.
i·meO B-31926
meter M-620 D-l64389
INDICATOR I-I06-A(Cont'd.)
E-620 # ANTENNA; Tele3~oplng anter_~a, 5/8 in. die., AnteLna Ward Type
collapsed length i in., extended length 27 in. BRA
H-620 # METER GUARD: Molded Polystyrene, three 0.160 in. Protection to meter M-620 Injection B-310%
dia. mounting holes, 120~ apart on 1-37/64 in.
radii, 0.095 In. thick in central section,
3-1/2 in. overall d1e.
H-621 SPRING: Antenna mounting tension, 1/2 in, by Antenna stud tension \iliCD ES-6g4377
1-3/16 in" . 020 sprin& steel, ',277 die. hole.
H-b22 STUD: Antenna mounting, 1 094 in. long, steel. Maintains position of WECO ES-69!\475
antenna
M-620 METER: 0-200 microamperes d-o, 3-1/2 in. dia. Indicates amplitude of Weston 301 ES-692420
by 20 in. high. 3 mounting holes for 6-32 scre ..... s, circulating current in GE DO-4l
:I>
...'"
120 apart. Accuracy 2% at full scale, 3-1/2 tlJ....'1.sd circui t WSTR NX-35
m Z
...'"
in. metal case. Triplett m
'" 321 0 V>
'"....
n
m
C
N-620 DIAL: "Plano-Verniet''' knob and dial assembly,
2-3/4 in. O.D. by 2-1/8 in. high, scale
Vernier adjusting device
for capacitor C-620
Hickok 46
Simpson 25
Crowe
No. 298
ES-692421
-..,-, ""....
'",
0 ?i
m
C
calibrated in megaCYCles, mounting hole 41/64 in.
radius.
Plano-
Vernier
Type
'"
# WRENCH ASSEMBLY: Hexagonal, includes tube and VHF transmitter tuning liECO ES-693997
bushing, 7/16 die.. by 3/8 in. approx.
... ..!l.'"o·
# SCREWDRIVER: 3 in. blade, fluted conical point, For Phillips head screws WECO 8020
vood or bakelite handle, Phillips size No.1.
g
<T ~
CONTRACT OR ORDER NO. NXsa-4000l
;;;
PAGE 44 OF 70 PAGES ;§
'"
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL ~IRCRAFT RADIO EQUIPMENT AN/ARC-5 MAJOR UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT lE-35-A
RE.FERENCE ARMy STOCK NUMBER
NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,AN,.9..... ORAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEf DESIGNATfvr SPEC. NO.
# WRENCH: Hexagonal, L-shaped, 3/4 by 2-1/4 in, For hex. socket head No. 8 All-en EB-694745
cap screws in reo. drive Bristol
unit mounting
# WRENCH: H8xagonal, L-shaped, 9/16 by 1-3/4 in. For hex. socket head No. 6 Allen Es-694747
set screws in trans. Bristol
crystal switch
# WRENCH: 4-spline, L-shaped, 9/16 by 1-5/4 in. For No. 6 Briata 4-spllne Allen E3-694746
set screws Bristol
# WRENCH ASSEMBLY: Hexagonal, includes tube and For trans. tuning WECO E8-693997
bushing, 7/16 dia. by 5-3/8 In. approx.
:I>
'"m Remova.l of rec. type tubes WECO ES-696299
...'"
# TUBE EXTRACTOR: U-shaped spring strip with hook Z
ends, 4-1/2 in. long . m
....
."
0
eo
II>
'"
i'i -•• a'"
'"-
0
rri IT!
<::I C
'"
OJ
'"
.... V>
C
<T
;;
"n
~
0°
~
'" ~
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL AIRCR.i\.."'T RADI0 EQUIPMENT AN/ARC-S MAJOR UNIT TEST EQi:rIP~EN;: AN/GRM-l
REFEREW.... ARMY STOCK NUMBER
Vi;. NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEf; DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
AI\TIFICIAL ANTEXNA: Coaxial plug and 50-ohm Matches input impedan;;e WECO E8-692884
resistor. Terr..inals prov:!.ded for soldering. of VHF radio ree. to D- l S0892
signal generator
SHUNTING UNIT
SHUNTING UNIT: 1500 ohm resistor and ,006 MF Al1grunent of i-f stages ~"ECC
capacitor Con~ected in series. Has 2 insulators, of VHF radio rec. " '~C.984
2 crocodile clips. 2-9/16 by 4 by 11/16 in.
overall approx.
-,
o, !:i'"
-
RECEPTAClE: 12-contact assembly, includes No. Connects to modulat0r WECO B- 32828
m
0 513(.. nut. 1-7/8 in. dia. by 7/8 in. high. m
Similar to ARS No. 9417. C
J-61l
Ii:
RECEPTACLE: Same as J-6lG Connects to transmitter
rack or adapter
M-6l0 METE~: 0-1.0 milliampere d-c, 0_100 scale, 150 ohms Multi-range indicator Weston ~JPe ES-693084
± 1%, )-1/2 in. bakelite case. These meters re~ No. 301
quire 8- steel ring per Drawing B-4C090 when Triplett
nameplace panels are non_ferrous material. This Type No.
ring is furnished with all meters in spare parts 321
per Drawing B-40217. Simpson
Type No.
25
Hickok
!lpe No.
RESISTOR: 'rlire wound, 50,000 ohms ± 1%, 9/16 in. Meter multiplier IRe Type
dia. by 1 in. long. 2 lugs, 5/16 in. long Wl44
RESISTOR; Case 13/16 in. dia. by 2-13/16 in. long, Meter multiplier WECO
contains one WECO resistqr per D-163450-A,
500,000 ohms ± 1%, 1 watt, 11/16 in. die. by
3-1/16 in. long including lead wires.
REFERENCE ~~~~ ~~~~K ~UUM~BE'W NAME OF PART AND DESCRiPTION FUNCTION MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFE RENeE NUM8Ef DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
TEST UNIT I-I04-A Test of LF, MF, HF or VHF WECO ES-693934 :r>
'"m radio receiver D-15 0727 :z
'"'"m...
V>
-I
'"
C-601 CA~ACITOR: Dry electrolytic, 3 MF, JOO WVDC,
3/4 in. dia. by 1-13/16 in. long approx. in .
By-pass capacitor @
Mallory
Es-6926 S1 0
""-• n'"
....mn sealed aluminum container. Spra.gue
...
<::>
E-600 KNOB: Molded black bakelite 3/4 in. dis. by
5/8 in. high. White filled pointer 1-1/4 in.
long, No.8_52 set screw.
Knob for g!Jitches
volume control
and K-K
S-292 -IL
Es-694358
-'"
0
.•., m<::>
E-6cl BINDING POST: Spring type, engraved "-", 1/2 in. For test lea.ds ARH modi- Es-694420
dia. by 1-1/2 in. long threaded section 3/4 in. fied No.
long with O.138~32 thread, polished nickel plate 1755
finish.
E-602 BINDING POST; Spring type, engraved "+", otherwise For test leads ARH modi- ES-694408
same as E-601. fied No.
17::5
F-6oo FUSE: Cartridge type" 10 ampere, 5 second delay. For L.V. + line Littelfuse 4414
(Interchangeable with Signal Corps FU-2l). No. 10SlC
Huseman
T:tpe MIlL
J-600 JACK: Telephone, 5/8 in. dia. by 1/2 in. high, To headset or output WECO 4'591
approx . meter
.I-601 RECEPTACLE; 6_contact includes No. 5131 nut. To J-IC3 of radio receiver WECO 5577
R-28/ARC-5
'"
iD
'"
OJ
'"
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL AIRCRA>i'T RADIO EQUIP:!<1ENT AN/ARC-5 MAJOR UNIT '1'EST EQUIPME"lT AN/GRM-l
z»
R-60l RESISTOR: Wire wound, 10 ohms ± 1%, 1 watt, Meter shunt Nilsson ES-694772
2-1/2 by 3/B by 1/16 in.
...'"'"
m
R-602 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 2800 ohms ± 1%, 1 watt, Meter mu1 tiplier Nilsson No, ES-69477?; g,
a'"
m
C
R-603
1 in. max. by 5/8 in. high.
RESISTOR: Film type, 4 megor~s ± 1%, 2 watt.
Leads 1-1/2 in. long, No. 18 wire, 9/32 in.
dia. by 1-3/4 in. long.
Meter multiplier
2072
ec CO
Type X-2
ES-6g4775 --
1>
~
R-604 RESISTOR: Film type, 10 megohms ± 1%, 5 watt. Meter multiplier cc CO Es-694774
Leads 1-1/2 in. long, No. 18 wire, 1/2 in. dia. Type X-5
by 2 in. long.
R-605 RESISTOR: Same as R-602 Meter multiplier
R-606 RESISTOR: Wire wound, 0.025 ohm + 1/2%, - 1-1/2% Meter shunt Nilsson ES-69!1777
to carry 10 amp., 2-1/2 by 1/4 by 1/4 in, 4 No. D-2/OO
lead wires No, 16 ins'G1ated copper 12 in. long,
2 mounting holes tapped No.4-40, 1/4 in. deep.
R-607 RESISTOR: Film type, 1.0 megohm ± 1%, 1 watt. Meter multiplier co CO Es-694776
Leads 1-1/2 in., No. 18 wire, 9/"')':2 in. dia. hy Type X-l
1 in.
8-600A,B SWITCH ASS~~LY: 4-pole, 5-position switch ow MOW OFF NYC AVe switch WECO Es-69440C
assembled with SPST filament switch, 2-1/2 by
2 by 1_1/2 in.
3-601 SWITCH: 2-section, 7-position switch Meter transfer switch Mallory Es-694401
Special RJ"1
...'"
m
Crystal Freq. Carrier Freq. 0 VI
in KiIocrcles
'"....
;:; 5,555·555
in Me~BcIcle3
100
CO
.!..
0, ...;:;'"
..,-
m 6,222.222 Hi.:
6,833·333 m
1:1 12 3 1:1
b,333.333 132
,1ll.HI
8,666.666
146
156 '"
CRYSTAL UNIT DC-31
CRYSTAL UNIT: Pressure type, BT-cut, or plated For servicing vP,,'" Ph::.1co
type, AT-cut. Frequency accuracy ± 0.025%, for receivers WECO
temperature range _50°0 to +90°C. Molded bakelite D-151431 ES-691811
holder, 1-13/64 by 1-1/8 by 7/16 in. deep, wHh D-151432 E8-696395
two pin base. Four crystals are supplied with
each Test EqUipment AN/GRM-I, calibrated in kilo-
cycles, as indicated by the nameplate on each
holder.
Crystal Freq. Carrier Freq.
in KllocZc18s in M8g:BcZcles
4,045.833 104
4,712.500 120
5,712.500 144
6,212.500 156
'"....m
n CD-745
assembly. Modification of Cord CD-533 per
drawip~ No. 7382.
CORD: Coaxial transmission line, 52-ohms impedance, VHF transmi t tel' to WECO ES-6g4606
..- n'"'"'"
Z
0
,
m
....
-'" ...
coaxial fltLings on either end. Antenna A-8S-A 0,
0 #CD-905 CORD: 2-conductor cable, Plug PL-l5l and Plug
PL-157.
Sldetone test WECO ES-696728 .., m
0
CX-31/GRM-l CORD: 12-conductor cable, two plugg No. 9377. Power supply to trans. WECO ES-696347
Similar to ARO No. 9376. rack
CX-32/GRM-l CORD: l8-conductop cable, 2 plugs No. 6962. ON-OFF control and WECO ES-696348
Similar to ARC No. 5803. emission selection
CX- 33!GRM-l CORD: 8-conductor cable, terminate~ on one end in
plug No. 9599 and on other end in receptacle
assembly No. 9296. Similar to ARC No. 955'(. -Transmi tter rack adB.:;:>ter WECO B- 33692
CX_ 34/GRM-l CORD: Y-cord, consisting of two 6-conductor cables, Channel selection for WECO B-)2937
e~oh made from cable per drawing No. 6794. Common Trans. and Rec.
end terminated in Plug PL-154. Other ~erminations
are Plug PL-15l and Plug No. 6966.
'"
n
-I
# WRENCH ASSEMBLY: Hexagonal, in011ldes spring, tube
motor mountinr
m For trans. tuning WECO ES-693997
C and bushing, 7/16 by 5-3/8 in. approx.
1# TUBE EXTRACTOR: U-shaped spring strip with hook
ends, 4-1/2 in. long.
Removal of rec. type tubes WECO Es-6g6299
# ALIGNING TOOL: Fibre handle with 0.122 in. wide For rec. trimmers and Insuline
by 0.018 in. thick blade atone end and C .122 Ll. fil ters No. 1006
~de by 0.032 in. thick blade at other end. WECO
11 THICKNESS GAUGE: 25 leaves, first leaf 0.0015 in., Contact gap measurements Hanson Es-695312
remaining 24 leaves in consecutive thicknesses No. 25
from 0.002 to 0.025 in., 1/2 by 7/16 by 2-7/8 in. Goodell
No. 25
11 TOOL: Contact bUrnisher, sandblasted steel blades, For cleaning relay con- WECO
hard rubber handle, 4-31/32 in. overall length. tacts 2650
i# TOOL: Slotted end blade, hard rubber handle, For adj. relay springs WECO
3-7/8 in. overall length 270
...
-
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL AIRCRAFT RADIO EQ.TJIPMENT AN/ARG-'} MAJOR UNIT TEST EQUIPMEIIT AN/GRM-l
REFERENCE ARMy STOCK NUMBER
NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEF DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
# TOOL: Slotted end blade, insulated handle 4 in. For adj. relay springs WECO
overall length. 363
# T00L: Offset slotted end blade, i:>$ule.ted handle For adj. relay springs \/EGO
3-25/32 in. overall length 535A
# TOOL: Slotted end blade, 3-1/32 in. long. For adj. relay springs \/ECO
303
'"....
;:; # CONTROL UNIT C-30/ARC-5 ON-OFF trans. control and
challi~el selection
\/EGO
D-151760
B-32611
- a'"
m
<:> #
#
CONTROL UNIT C-43/ARC-S (with name plate and dials
for 190-550 kc and 3-6 me).
Ai'ITENlIA RELAY UNIT BC-442-A, RE-2/ ARC-S. Similar to
Rec. control
Antenna switching
WECO
D-151807
B- 34151
-
o,
~
m
C
# DYNAMOTOR DM-33-A, DY-8/ARC-S (Dynamotor Unit Provides d-c high vOltage caNT 5168
# assembly, including mounting base). to transmitting equipment "r/ECO
GE
WSTH
# MOUNTING BASE FT-279-A, MT-62/ARC-5 ( 5imilar to For 2 rec 0 rack WECO 5694
# ARC No. 5694) B-33603
# MOUNTING BASE FT-227-A, MT-70/ARC-5 (Similar to For 2 trans. rack WECO 7062
# ARC No. 7062) B-33604
# MOU~~ING BASE FT-225-A, MT-76/ARC-5 ( Similar to For modulator WECO 7058
# ARC No. 7058) B- 33605
# MOUNTING BASE FT-229-A, MT-77/ARC-5 (Similar to For anten.'18 relay unit WECO 7056
# ARC No. '(056) B-33606
l>
...'"'" '"m
m # MOUNTING PLATE FT-228-A, MT-Bo/ARC-S (Similar to For Control Unit WECO 7083 Z
# ARC No. 7083) C-30/ARC-5 B-33588 0
'"...
'"
n
... # MOt~ING PLATE FT-222-A, MT-98/ARC-S (Similar to For Control Unit lliECO 7054- ""0, n'"
-
# ARC No. 705 4 ) 0-43/ARC-5 B- 33592
, ...
m
0 #
#
MOUNTING RACK FT-277-A. M'J'-63/ A.l1C-5 (Similar to
ARC. No. 5018)
For 2 rec. WEOO 5018
B-33607
-... m
0
# MOU~ffING RACK MT-71/ARC-S ( Simllal;,' to ARC No. 930,() For 2 trans. WEOO 8-33679
'"
DYNA~OTCR~ *DY_2/ARR_2
....m'"
n
<::I
Ct-ncluOOs Er22)
WSW I-G-SJ!33
ASB"IJJ.. 1
includes
brush
--
o, a'"
m
<::I
holders
RD 25B32A.-1 '"'"
A-16 # YOKE: Stator shell Holds A-20 CON'r 22944
GE
K-81cc6;'21<_U
io.tSTH
1-C-5431
Assro, 1
RD 8a6A
A-17 END COVER: Cover Covers, brushes, etc. CONT 19954-1
GE
K-585916lAD
PT2
WSTH
5-D-7098
Item 2
RD 33A6-2
A-20 # POLE: Field pole assemtlly Part of magnetic path SONT 21667
GE
K.81CcE82AAl
WSTH
5-D-7113
Assm. 1
RD 3A3A
c- 34 CAPACITOR: Fixed, mica, 0.001 MF, ±20%, 500 WVDC R-F filter CM25Al02M
AEROVOX
1465
GE
K-SIC4C7'7A.t\
PTl
WSTH
93-D-287
Item 3
RD !!9A5-1
)0
'"m D-l # DYNAMOTOR MACHDTE: Dynamotor rr~chine H-V for receiver WECO Z
'"
m
'".... KS-5572
CONT
0
'"'"-<
-••
CO
'"
Q 25926...ws-:610
GE n
....
....-'"
0
m M-5 84 5839 m
0 (SDY82AB1) CI
WSTH
957972A
RD TIs·a4!;
E-2 # AR~~~TURE: Armature assembly Rotor CONT
27329-w'3-761(.
GE
K-81226J2A,~
1,{3TH
6-B-9580
Assm, 2
RD 4E13A-2
E-16 CAP; Screw cap for L.V. and H.V. brush holders Keeps brush in holder CONT
23607-2
GE
K-810::698,l\...!lJ.
WSTH
'i-I'- 9423
Assm. 1
RD 29AIC
.
CONTRACT OR ORDER NO. NXsa-4000l PAGE 56 OF 70 PAGES
...
Q
r;r
"'"
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL AIRCRAFT RADIO EQUIPMENT AN/ARC-S MAJOR UNIT DYNAMoTOR *DY-2/L>l..'9.-2
REFEREN"'''' ARMy STOCK NUMBER MFR,ANO
I.KO NAVY TYPE NUMBER NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION DRAW!NG OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEI DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
E-17 # HOLDER: Brush holder L.V. For L.V. brushes CONT
2)610·,),;
GE
1K'-8100707AA3
( Included
,~n A-15)
IwSTH
1-0-5434
~.ssm. 2
I-->tD 38A25A-l
E-1S BRUSll: -Brush assembly, L.V. (+) Collects current from CONT
armature 23609-3(+)
GE
1;~8100699AC
Gr. 1 (Incl,
one + and
l~ne - brush)
lWSTH
7-D-8756 l>
~,ssm, 5 :z m
'"'"....
m !-"n 24A22A-1 '"
'"
,'" ....
0
'"...
r;
E-19 BRUSH: Brush assembly, L.V. (-) Collects current from
armature
ceNT
23609-3(-)
-, ...r;'"m
-
OR (Include 0
m lin E-18)
0::> jWSTTI Q
7-D-8756
ssm. 4 '"
'"
D 24A22A-:2
E-20 BRUSH: Brush assembly, H.V. (+) Collects current from CONT
armature 3609-4 (+)
E
-S893S83AD
;r', 1 (Incl.
ne + and
ne - brush)
STH
-D-8755
ssm, 3
D 24A23A-l
E-21 BRUSH: Brush assembly, H.V. (-) Collects current from ONT
armature 3609- 4 (-)
E (Include
n E-20)
3TH
7-D-8755
Assm. 4
D 24A23A-2
H-13 # PIN.; Lock pin for brush holder, L.V. and H.V. Locks E-17 and E-22 to CONT
A-l5 25926 -19
GE
K-s36sesPAz
PT3
WSr;:11
836146
Tte~ 15
RD 56,1\5- 3
H-lit # DOWEL: Dowel pin for locking end shield Locks end shield A-l5 CONT
259 26 - 26
GE
K-8127e44fu'\.-
PTI
H-15 # BOLT; Clamp bolt Connects end srields '::;ONT
25926-13
GE
K-81oc68SAA
....'"
m PTIO
V> WSTH
5-D-71 04
'"
....mn
Item 1 :I>
Z
...• '"'"....
RD lOA35-1
m
<:I H-16 # WAS1rER: LockW8sher for clamp bolt Locks B-15 CONT 0
25926-25
GE - n'"....
-
K-935283 7rm- 0
PTll
• m
<:I
WSTH
2-D-7 43
Item 12
'"'"
RD 39Al-2
H-17 # NUT: Nut for clamp bolt, hex. 6-32 by 7/64 in., Holds H-15 SONT
brass. nickel plated. 259 26 - 24
WSTH
6-B-9§01
Item 0
GE
(descrIbe)
RD 15A10-1
CONT
-.-.. a
o, '"
m
1:1
259 26 - 2 7
GE '"
K-'585375iAA-
PT7
WSTH
93-D-397
Item 2
RD 2lA25
H-22 # SCREW: Screw, connects L.V. and H.V. leads Holds leads to connecting CONT
lug 25926-20
GE
K-SS28728.l\A-
PTS
WSTH
23-D-531
Item 15
RD 10A30-1
H-2; # WASHER; Lockwasher for connecting screw Used with H_22 CONT
25926-21
OE
K-5 8S5C39A\-
PT21
WSTH
2-D-743
Item 12
RD 39A5
H-24 # SCREW: Screw for f1eld pole (M.S.F.H. 8-32 by Holds pole A-20 CONT
3/8 in. steel, nickel plated) 25926-17
W3TH
1-C-5493
Item 5
OE
(descl'lbe)
RD lOA16-3
H-25 # 'rHROWER: Oil thrower Prever;.ts oil from reaching COl'IT 21666 l>
;'" C8mmutators GE
K-810059JP..Al
"WSTH
Z
0
,
'"....m
IJ'I
-
CO
!!!
n
4-D-4769
Item 7 '"
n
.-..
..... 0, ....
m RD 21A24-1
m
'" B_26
B-31A #
STUD:
WASHER :
Stud (on dyns.motor base)J 4_40 thread
Washer J 0.002 in. shim
Dynamotor orientation
Shim for bearing
WECO 5219
'"
1:1
W-2
RD 17A17
'"
• # WIRE: Connecting lead and terminal L.V. (+) L.v. (+) CONT
(No. 20 AWG, white). 25926-31
OE
K-81C071tP.I'
WSTH
5-D-71 2 5
Assm. 1
RD lSA36-5
W_) # WIRE: Connecting lead and terminal H.V. (+) H.V. (+) CONT
(No. 20 AWG, red). 25926-32
GE
K-fuam6AAl
WSTH
5-D-7125
Assm. 2
RD 18A37-4
INSULATION: InsuJation under coil Protects coil from yoke GE
K-SI355')18CJ-
PTI
A-71 # BASE: Base, including casting Holds dyn~motor and fitti~ WECO 5723
BASE CASTING: Base, d:te cast, part of above WECO 5174
C-50 # CAPACITOR: Fixed, mica, 0.006 MF ± 20%. 500 WYnG R-F filter ,0140A622:1<1
ICONT
'l~k824- 32
K-8104C?6.~~I\
PTl
WST}!
5-D-7140
Item 1
CD 3L
...'"'"
(SDY 83AB1) Z m
WSTH 0
'".... -..,,,
957971-."1 ..~
i'i
...i'i'"
m
o
F-75 # CAP: Screw cap for L.V. brush holder Keeps L.V. brush in holder CONT
23607-1
GE
K..8lD0712AAl
-'"
0
m
0
WSTH
5-D-7005
."138m. 1
E-76 # HOLDER: Brush holder, L.V. POI' L,V. brushes CONT
2361C-7-X
GE
K-8100700M-)
(Incl>;.ced
in A-59)
WSTH
5-B-8277
Assm. 2
E-78 # CAP: Screw cap for H.V. brush holder Keeps H.V. br"ueh in hold€!;> CONT
236C7-2
GE
K-8:c0692AAl
W'STH
11-:-9423
Assm. 1
E-79 # BRUSH: Brush aS8m. L.V. (+) Collects current from CONT
armature 2360 9-9(+)
GE
K-s859146AD
Gr.1CInel.
lone + and
one - brush)
!7-D-S6o:
wST11
A3sm. 3
:I>
....'"
:z
...'"
m E-80 # BRGSH: Brush assembly, L.V. (- ) Collects current from :O:'lT m
V>
armature 236 °9-9(-) 0 VI
,
-
CIO •
'"
1j
GE (L'lch:eed
in E-79)
'"...
n
m
o
WSTH
7-D-86 01
Ass:n, 4 -
0,
..., "'
'"
0
7-D-860l
Assm. 1
REFERENCE ~~~~ ~~~~K :U~M:E~R NAME OF PART AND DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MFR,AND DRAWING OR
SYMBOL BRITISH REFERENCE NUMBEF DESIGNATION SPEC. NO.
E-8; # SLOT WEDGE: Insulation (wire guard) Prevents chafing of lead COllT
wires 12061-424
GE
K-81C072QAA-
PTl ,~
WSTH
53-D-923
Item 19
E-84 # GRO~~ET: Gro~~et, circular Prevents chafing of lead CON']'
wires 27824-19
GE
K-810 1!J6SAA-l
WSTH
5-D-7168
Item 1
E-85 # AR~ATl~E: Armature assembly Rotor ""Oyr
12836-WS-
7666 l>
....'"
m
II>
GE
K-8J.<:fr)09M3
Z
~
'"m~
-o••
WST1l
'"....
n
m
t:1
6-B-9598
Assm. 2
~lth ball
bearing) -... a""
m
t:1
H-60 .# RETAINER: Bearing retainer Protects 0-50 CONT 23100
GE
'"
K-Blcc68QAA.
PT2
WSTH
5-D-7042
Item 2
H-61 # SCREW: Scrw.... for bearing retainar (M. S.F.H. 1~-40 Holds H_60 CONT
by 1/4 ln~ steel, nickel plated) 27824_24
WSTH
6-B-96 05
Item 4
GE
(describe)
H-62 DOWEL: Dowel pin for locklr~_ end shield Locks end shields A59 and CONT
A-61 27824-27
GE
K-81278!;.4Al,.-
PTI
'"'"
.,."....
ii"
TABLE OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
MODEL AIRCRAFT RADIO 'RQTTIPMEN'"
c AN/ARC - 5 , , -'..; -
'"
" " V,l
~ ,""
R-6) # NUT: Nut for clamp bolt, hex. 6-32 by 7/64- in. Holds H-65 CONT
thick brass, nickel plated. 2~{824-25
WSTH
6-B-96 05
Item 6
GE
(dew~T'ibe)
H-64 # WASHER: Lock washer for clamp bolt Lecks H-63 SONT
27824-26
GE
. "5852837AB-
PTll
WSTH
2-D-743 •
Item 12
!i- 65 # BOLT: Clamp bol t Connects end shield SON'!'
17042-424-
GE
K-81a:685AA- »
'"'"
m z
...'"
PT13 m
.... WSTH
oCO VI
5-D-7064
'"....
;:; Item 1
-,',i'., a'"
'"C H-66 # SCREW: Screw, connects L.V, and H.V. leads Holds leads CONT
27824-21
GE
- m
1:1
K-5828j28AA.
PT-S
'"
WS'PH
23:'D-531
Item 9
H- 6 7 # WASHER : Lock washer for connecting screw Used with H-66 CONT
27824_22
GE
K-5855029M-
PT21
WSTH
2-D-743
Item 12
H-68 Iii SCREW: Set screw for brush holder Locks brUsh holder CONT
27824_20
H-6S # PIN: Lock pin for brush holder Locks b!"ush holder WS'l'H
836146
Item 4
H-'(O # THROWER: Oil tcrower Prevents oil from reaching CONT 25230
commutator GE
K..8J..0:)719AA-
PTl
WSTH
5-D-7139
Item 3
H-71 # WASHER; Lock washer for cover scrBW Used with H-72 CONT
27824- 29
GE
K-5852837AA-
PTIO
U-72 # SCREW; Screw, cover holdi~ Holds end cover CON'T'
17043- 400 »
:z
'"....
m
V>
GE
K5%3363AB- o
'"....
n
PT4
WSTH '"o,
-,
-...
4-D-9508
m Item 1
" H-73 1# WASHER: Plain washer for cover screw· Used with H-72 CONT
27824-28
VI
GE
K-S863757AA
PT7
WSTH
93-D-937
Item 2
H-74 SCREW: Screw for field pole (10_24 by 1/2 in., Hold pole A-63 CONT
steel. plated). 27824-18
WSTH
1-C-5455
Item 4
GE
(describe)
H-8o~ STUD: Stud Dynamotor orientation WECO 5182
L-53
#
#
PLUG:
COIL:
Plug assembly, three contact
Field coil
Cormects to mcc.ulator
unit
Field col1 (two sections)
WECO
COXT
5173
--
""0, n
, '"
....
m
C
A _ Left
B - Right
26210,3 &
26210-4 '"'"
GE
V-5872740
W::':T11
l-C-S443
Assm. J
0-50 # BEARING: Ball bearing assembly Anti-f'rictlon ceNT
278211_11
GE
KJj3<J;&i9"'-
PT2
WSTH
5-D-71S8
Item 1
W-50 # GRotJNDING 51'RIP: Ground lead and terminals Ground c:on:,.0;::tion for CONT
L.V. (-) and H.V. (-). Tinned copper. :t.V. (-) and'H.V. (-) 27824- 30
GE
K-<"l324j0.iI.A_
PT2
WSTH
6-D-6538,
Item 2
CONTRACT OR ORDER NO. NXsa-40001 PAGE 69 OF 70 PAGES
\
W-51 # WIRE: COIh'1ectlng lead and ter:!!ins-l, H.V. (+ ) R.V. 1+1 CONT
(NO. 20 AWG, red) . 27824 31
GE
K-8lC.D1.l6AA.lj.
WSTH
5-D-71BO
Assro. 1
11-52 # WIRE: Connectlp..g lead and ter::l~:-,al , L,V. (+) L.V. (+ ) C8NT
(No. 20 AWG, White) , Part of L-53B (See L-53)
OE
(See L-53)
WSTH
5-D-7180
Asa!Jl. 2
-
0, '"
n
....
m
C -'"
to
m
C
~
DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO.
SCREWS
...;:;'"
m
Flathead, brass, #3-48 x )/16, cadmium plated Es-693 268 ~
0, '"
;:;
-I
m
o Slotted head, set screw, steel, #4-40 x 1/8, nickel plated Es-693 22 1 ~
0
Binding head, steel, #4-40 x 1/4, cadmium plated ES-693379
'"'"
Binding head, brass, #4-40 x 1/4, nickel pla,ted 6008
Flathead, steel, #4-40 x 9/32, cadmi~~ plated Eso693394
Binding head, brass, #4-40 x 13/52. cadmium plated Es-693052
Set, Brlsto, cup paint, steel, #6-32 x 1/8, blued Es-690676
Set, Bristo, cup paint, steel, #6-32 x 5/32, blued 4140
Set, Bristo, cup point, steel, #6-32 x 3/16, blued 4139
Binding head, steel, #6-32 x 1/4, cadmium plated ES-693528
Socket head, steel~ #6-32 x 1/4, cadmium plated Es-693374
Binding t .. ead, steel. #6-32 x 7/16, cadmium plated Es;.693557
Socket head, hexagonal, #6-32 x 7/16, cadmium plated Es-693373
Binding head, steel, #6-32 x 9/16, cadmium plated ES~695884
SCREWS, WASHERS AND NUTS~ ETC. USED ON AN/ARC-5 VHF EQUIPMENT (Cont'd.)
WASHERS l>
'"....m
V> Paper, red rope, 3/8 O.D. x 5/32 I.D. x .015 ES-693482
Z
oco '"....m
V>
,
'"Q Paper, red rope, 7/32 O.D. x ,105 I.D. x 1/64 Es-693CS4
o, '"....
n
m
1:1 Paper, red rope, 9/32 G.D. x .120 I.D. x .015 ES-692805 -'" m
1:1
Western Electric #P-210736, cold rolled, stee1 Es-692144 '"
Steel, cold rolled, .203 GoD. x .094 I.D. x .02G, cadmium plated ES-693213
Brass, 7/32 O.D. x .105 I.D. x .020, cadmium plated ES-693S29
Steel, 1/4 G.D. x 7/64 I.D. x 1/32, cadmium plated Es-692341
Brass, 9/32 D.D. x .132 I.D. x .025, cadmium plated Es-693047
Phenol fibre, 5/16 O.D. x .152 I.D. x 1/32 ES-69339 8
Steel, 3/8 D.D. x .172 I.D. x .032, cadmium plated ES-693 4 02
Steel, .187 D.D. x .094 I.D. x .020, cadmium plated Es-693309
Shakeproof lockwasher, #1206, cadmium plated ES-692839
Shakeproof 1ockwasher, #1202, cadmium or zinc plated Es-691998
Shakeproof lockwasher, #1220-2, cadmium plated ES-6923D7
Shakeproof' lockwasher, #1902, cadmi'.JlU plated ES-693348
11
Split #2, bronze, .094 x .18t! x .031 thick, no finish 8030
.... '"
.,. !l-
Q ~
iD o·
SCREWS. WASHERS AND NUTS, ETC. USED ON AN/ARC-5 VHF EQUIPMENT (Cont d.)
1
C-
,
;;
DESCRIPTION I:-RA"'\.JING NO.
.'" n...'"'"
m
0
....
V>
Bronze,~ #6. into tooth, no finish 4042
!!:
n
....m Shakeproof lockwasher, #1106. cadmium plated ES-692438
0 , ... m
<:1
C Steel, #8, non-linking~ cadmium plated ES-693785 '"'"
Brass, .187 O.D, x .089 I.D. x .016, no finish 3 8 76
NUTS
Nut, hexagonal. steel, #2-56 x 3/16 x 1/16, cadmium plated ES-692340
Nut, hexagonal. brass, #2-5 6 x .156 x .050, cadmium plated 4376
Nut. hexagonal, brass, #2-56 x .186 x <062, cadmium plated Es-693008
Nut, hexagonal. steel, #3-48 x 3/16 x 1/16, cadmium plated ES-6922 56
Nut, hexagonal, brass, #3- 48 x 3/16 x 1/16. cadmium plated Es-693269
Nut. hexagonal, steel, #h-40 x 1/4 x 3/3 2 , cadmium plated ES-692572
Nut, hexagonal, brass, #4-40 x 1/4 x 3/3 2 , cadmium plated ES-692148
Nut, hexagonal, steel, #4-40 x 3/],6 x 1/16, cadmium plated ES-692225
Nut. hexagonal. steel, #4-40 x 1/4 x 3/3 2 , cadmium plated ES-692512
Nut, hexagonal, steel #6-32 x 5/16 x 7/64, cadmium plated Es-692442
SCREYrS, WASHERS AND l'.TUTS, ETC. USED ON AN/ARC-5 VHF EQUIPJ.1ENT (Cont'd.)
CLAMPS
Cable, formed, steel, 1-5/32 x 3/8 x .0312 , cadmium or zinc plated B- 31401
>
'"....'"
m
Cable, formed, steel, 1-3/16 x .375 x .0375, cadmium plated B- 33164
Z
0
'"....m
'"
!:i'" '".!... n'"
Cable, formed, steel, 1 x 3/8 x .0312, cadmium plated Es-69330"!
....
m
o Cable, formed, steel. 3/4 x 3/8 x .0312, cadmium plated
Cable, formed, steel, 3/4 x 5/16 x .031, cadmium plated
Es-693478
..,? m
0
Es-693778
'"
FASTENR"I.S
Sems, 3-48 x 5/32, binding head, steel, cadmium plated, int. tooth Es-692222
Sems, 3-48 x 3/16, binding head, steel, cadmium plated, lnt. tooth Es-6g2C74
Sems, 3- 48 x 7/32, binding head, steel, black nickel, into tooth ES_692223
Sems~ 3-48 x 1/4, binding head, steel, cadmium plated, int. tooth Es-693115
Sems, 4-40 x "5/32, binding head, steel, cadmium plated, into tooth Es-693210
Sems, 4-40 x 3/16, binding head, brass, nickel plated, into tooth Es-6926g8
Sems, 4-40 x 3/16, binding head, steel, cadmium plated, lnt. tooth Es-692073
Sems, 11-_40 x 3/16, binding head, steel, black nickel~ into tooth ES-694848
Sems, 4-40 x 7/32, binding head, steel, cadmium plated, int. tooth ES-693959
Seme, 4-40 x 1/4, bindir.g head, steel, cadmium plated, int. tooth ES-693079 '"
~
....0 !l.
o·
Sems, 4_40 x 1/4, bindir>.g head, brass, black nickel, int. tooth Es-693641 IT ~
;;
.,. ~
SCREWS, WASHERS AND NUTS, ETC. USED ON AN/ARC-5 VHF EQUTP:>1ENT (Cont1d.)
PINS
Grooy, steel, 3/4 x 3/16, zinc plated 4166
Grooy, steel, 3/64 x 5/3 2 , zinc plated 4165
Groav, steel, 3/64 x 1/4, zinc plated 415 6
Groov, steel, 3/64 x 5/16, zinc plated 6012
Graav, steel, 1/16 x 9/32 , cadmiuJl1 pla ted Es-693222
SCREWS, WASHERS AND NUTS, ETC. l}SED ON AN/ARC-5 VHF EQUI?.1':E:~7 (Contld.)
DESCRIPTION
PINS (Cant'd.)
Groov, steel, 1/16 x 1/4, z.inc plated
RIVETS
Tubular, brass, 0062" x 5/64, nickel plated 4567 l>
'"'"
m
-I Special head, steel, .063 x ,094 corrosion resistant Es-692744
Z
0
'"m
V>
-I
'"....
;:; '".c. ;:;
'"
Tubular, brass, .101 x 3/32, cadxlurr: plated ES-6928 47
m ? -I
m
TU8cllar, brass, 11/64 x .090, cadnium plated ES-693186
" '"'" "
SPRINGS
Spiral, 15 turns, close W"ound, right-hand, 13/.32 long x .090 dia. 3984
Formed, phosphor bronze, . 750 dia . x 1/8 high x .020 thick, nickel plated 6834
Formed, phosphor bronze, 1·534 x 3/4 x 1/3 2 thick, cadmium plated B- 35365
Formed, phosphor bronze, 47/64 x 1-1/2 x 15/32, 1/2 thick, silver plated B- 36596
Formed, 1.344 x 33/6 11 x .015, beryllium copper or phosphor bronze, ca:::':::.:";,,;::: plated Es-6g2741
Formed, 3-3/8 x ·34) x 33/64 , copper beryllium or phosphor bronze, cad:;:::!_'-'-.,:: plated Es-6g2743
Spiral, 19/3 2 x .300 dia. , .016 music wire, cad.'1lium or zinc plated ES-692826
Formed, has one Dzus fastener, 1" long, x 1/32 thick ES-69 2843
Formed, music wire, ,045 dlao, 5/8 long x .150, cadmium plated Es-6928 115
Formed, phosphor bronze~ .875 x 0250 x .020, silver plated Es-69 2 914 V>
Formed, phosphor bronze, 1/2 x 7/32 x .009, silver plated Es-692924 "9-.
o
~
:5
SCRE\,fS, WASHERS AND NUTS, ETC. USED ON AN/ARC-5 "'liF EQ::nPMEN7 (Cont'd.)
RESTRICTED 167
Seclion VII RESTRICTED
Table 7 AN 08-10-195
168 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN OS-lO~ i 95
1° ~
CRYSTAL UNIT DC":50,SET OF FOUR
12.3
f"'\ '
I 13.6
'I
L-J
RADIO TRANSMITTER
T-23/ARC 5
f
~
SET OF TUBES fOR RECEIVER
CRYSTAL UNIT DC"3I, SET OF FOUR
DY NAMOTOR pDY-Z! ARR" 2 ~
0.6
0.3
17.5
~ FOOT 0.1
0.06
r----I
0.07
r----------------------------/~J ~--~
Ii MOUNTING BASE
MT-70/ARC·5
j-
PLUG
6578
MOUNTING BASE
MT-G4!ARC- 5 ~----------------15t---------------------~
RESTRICTED 169/170
-ji,L_ 5"
~
eI
,
'11
7053
FT-235-A
* "n-4/ARR-2
I
'I
l1
rJ
<b @
J
I"
u ," II
--~-
16 II
16 I Is
l..- 9" !
I 91" _ _ _ _ _ _ _....1
~I"
34
~~
","
I ~.=1
I
AOB .. "e.0"O.
n
"C
! I
II" 115 "
48 5 32
0 I
I
11
I
_..1
j
~ CONTROL UNIT
1
C-42/ARC-S CONTROL UNIT
I" 1
38'-<>1
WEIGHT OF
MOUNTING PLATES ONLY
ADAPTER M-359
PLUG PL--259-A
NAVY TYPE -49195
WT. 0.06 LBS.
SOCKET SO - 23 9
NAVY TYPE -49194
WT. 0.04 LBS.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
08-10-195
Ii I DYNAMOTOR ov-a/ARC-5
I'
,U'
'I (::::..::::::==========:=:.-=:
MODULATOR MO-7 fARC-S
I!
I
~
RADIO RECEIVER
R-Z8/4RC-5 MOUNTING RACx
MOUNTiNG SASE MT 9 69/ARC .5-
*"T-5/&IIR-1.
MOUNTING SASE
MT'" 68/ARC"'5
FOR CONNECTiON TO
TEST UNIT 1-155-4
PLUGS ·491,5
(PL-25S-A) ,
ANTENNA
RESTRICTED 175/176
RESTRICTED
08- 10-195
? ]1
i,
~=====:""::::::II
"ODULATOR
o Ii
\1
MO- 7/ARC o 5 II
n
i
A E
NOTE 3
I
.~O ""~1J""'" I
'1'1
IUDIO RECEIVER
R·Z8/ ARC~5
ti
Il AS REOUIREO
1
R.:!3 TO R.n/ARC 0 5 ,1
,
i I
RESTRICTED 177/17S
n.R"'!NAl.~R~.>EJ"fNI
OJ:" ~E:C£PTAO...£S
,r410, ~HIIJH!:; ~·Z
____.L
--- - - - - - -------~
==~~==~~===~==~===~~----===============================================================
T[RMINAL AAA.AJtfGE""ENT
OFREC£PTAQ..(S
J·60 AND J~G I
I-----~--------------------
i /------- -----
SELECTCFlP\.xrE
C~M:CTEOlO ,
H02' P'O'SITJ(»I
I
I
rrRt.l~A.l ARRAI\IGEM€.NT
Of" R£C!PTAO.,.tS
J-70 ~OJ-Tl
RESTRICTED
08-10-195
~YlPIIAl ARIIt~MENT
Of REClPTAo..ES
f ·302 CENTER
TURRET RIGHT SlOE
NOTES
'----rrl--~-~~
I '/ jI
: ? L L L '
i rr
L _____=:~
TRANSMITTER REMOTE CONTROL BOX
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
HEATER CONNECTIONS
TO VACUUM TUBES
1
+220V
+28 V
-rl-l-H,-----,----'
6 6 b I
NOTE I.
~~~~I~~~~ ~~D~~iDS':JiI1WN
; AI i C/ 0/ INDUCTANCE Of THE STRAIGHT STUD
BY ~CH CONOENSERS C102, CI03
1 '(, i~ I_ .I
'I
AND CI04 ARE CONNECTED TO GROUND,
!
I
L- ______-_ --'
TRANSMITTER REMOTE CONTROL BOX
Figure 61-VHF Receiver wifh Seleclor )_7111 __ "':m"lifi"r! Schematic Circuit
RESTRICTED 181/182
RE
AN
IT - - - - - - - - - - - - , T ------------
OIVC
rI -
S-;;;- - T,~i:;}
c=-::::::r====t' =-!
"" 1
?~
J ': . ;
t 5414
"',,~.
J
PlECE ! OEseR
I BYPASS COl
! 5 SCREEN ORa
! Q OECOUPUNG
i K I GATb9D£ SIA
NOTE 'I
ANTENNA COUPUN(
OOTT£O. IS FORM£[
INDUCTANCE OF TH
BY WHiCH COf',DfN~
AM) CI04 ARE co
RE
RESTRICTED
08-10-195
________~______------~------------------------~--~~AA~~RN'2~.v_------_+----------------~~--------------4-----~
~vc
HUTER CONNECTIONS
TO VACVUM TUSES
L_
t220V.
RESTRICTED 183/184
RESTRICTED
AN OfHO-195
NOTES'
I. THE IN()t(;TOR SHO
CONSISTS SOLELY (
ANO C 104 ARE CO
2. IN INITIAL PIlCOO(
IN PARALLEL Win·
VARIABLE
30"'TO
R161 .2~Ml:\l
SCUELCH
CONTROL
+-_.__ .. _--. -_ .. _--..._- .. _- ,'._- "--'" .-- .. - _ .. - - "--"--" --~-- .. --/:._-_ .. _-_ ...-----' L ___ ~lSTAL_.::I~ l __......._ _. _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ . _
OC.31_
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
-----~~-;:~------
AMptlf1ER
VT2B8
JAN-125H7
\ I
DYNAMOTOR p-DY- 21 ARR-2
. CHANNEL e
~WN!'..L~.JLC'-O------------~~~-_-_.
.. _ _ .. _ _ _ . _ _ .. _ _ _ _ _ .. ~_O._'O'_A~~L_ECT_OR_":':~ I
!CR~AL~'~D~'~l _____________ _
RESTRICTED 185/186
"<
< ~o
~~~
"'':0
~~
.---_.
I I
~~ I
I III
::!'
to
~
0.
-t>..
~
I
::t:
.."
RESTRICTED
---------------1
NOTES
COUPLING,
C!02,C!03
!~~
~~L I Rile .27MEG
~~,\'::.-~-~41------------
c.-rE~____________________ _
L __________________ . _____ . ___ ~
I
osc a
'i'lM GEN
286
12SH7
L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~I :
(CRYSTAL UNITS DC· 31)
II I
l
__ --'-"'::""O"'~i.__~_ __..I.__- --------------------O:'-IOZ-SELCC-To-R --------~ ----------------------~
r----------=C--30~5i I25MMF !
)
, ,
'---------;-'----f------------i----.l-'-1-1=-'-r::, ~5~~1
II 1'
! II R-F AMP I •
• R-F AMP"
/
I PLATE VOU (
I 2··H-G 10 \
/ I
, I" H-G I.
J -308
ON THE REAR
FOR
CONNECTION
:;~wj
TO RACK
SEL
~
/ CAMS ASSOCIATED WITH TURRET f "302. g
N
3
80
~ .n VOLT. REG. I
Figun
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-'195
/---
TO VHF
RADIO RECEIVER
NOTES
I, TERMINALS MARK ED
W;€RMINALS ON (2) AND (S) HE
V-:;Ol, SOCKET X-301 FD?
2,
H .. ;-U!AFiC-?
250
NOFMAL
VA LUi-":s ....
NORMAL
VI'.l.UE::
CIRCHl,}' MF.A5tmi;n ROfUUl.
CONTROL SWITCH IN C'W Oft Mew VALUl':..5
1.70; UEA'!'£R CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
HIPU'I' VOl.TAOE~-PJUAARY SOURCE 2R-31
S6 6.00 MI1.l.IJl.MPERI:::-J SCREEN VOLTAGE:--TUREj. }AN-l(,2',
CRY3'l'AL UNITS
CRY8'rAL Ul!IT KC
CRYSTAL UNIT KC
CRYSTAL Ul!IT KC
CRYSTAL tm 1 T KG
CHY3TAL UNIT KG
CRYSTAL UN IT KG
CRYSTAL me IT KG
CRYSTAL UNIT KG
CRYSTAL tmlT KC
CRYSTAL UN IT KG
r,nyt>TAL UNIT ItC
CRYSTAL UN I 'Ii KC
CRYSTAL UftlT KC
CHYSTAl: UNIT KG
CRYSTAL Uf11T Ke
QUANTITY WE PART
\/RE!fCll 1<3-6<14746 NO. 6 BRISTO SOCKET SE'l' SCREd5 IN DOl'S, LltVlmS, ETC.
3CR~IVER \IE-B020 PHILLIPS HKAD SCREWS
OAUGE 1<3-6<15.'12 CONTACT AnTU3'M1tENT
'fOOL 1IE-f'265C ,RIa..AY CO'ffTACT CI...EAlfIJ'fO A1JD BURNI3HIfW
TOOL 1lK-f'270 R.E:L.AY 5PRIRO ADJ'U3TKIrnT
TOOL VK-/}6> RKLAY SPRInG ADJUSTMENT
T00L ""-1555' RELAY SPRING A..")J'U3TKE.J("T
TOOL IlK-I>'>} RKLAY BPRINO A.D.TU3TMENT
RESTR!CTED 191/192
f1..UG 696$
o70 0e 6'6
0 T
5°40 ~
'66 b
"O°o21R
PlUG 4;')64
( Pl·.t!>'" ~
PUJG £.784
I. WHI1( tTl tPL-15J)
2 REO IT}
3 BLUE IT)
4. GRH.N(l}
5 BLAD<{Rl
6 YELLOW(T)
7 WHITE (R)
8 REO(R,
9.BLUEtR)
IOGREEN(R)
II. 6L"-Cf( tTl
12. NO CONNECTION ("I
______"""""_'_C:::"__"-'-_____________________________
TO TEST UNIT
I-I04·A
j NO CONN'(CTI(')N
2 BLUE ,. YELLOW
3. GRtEN
4 BLACJ( (GAOV"lO)
ALTER "tATE CONSTRI)CTION~
5 HLlDW M ETHOO I SHOWN ON
Ii WHITE CORD C)(-3VGAM-1
r eAOW~
6 RED
TO TEST UNIT
TS-SO/O""'"
~
<1l
I. SLACK
2. REO
l'ELlOW
SROwN
SLuE
0- G~E[M
~
;;a n
I
m Q
0-
-I
;;a f
o 0'
-I ...
m -t MTgv~fl~~~(A~J(
o ~
.3'
<::
-0"
3 PlUG-GHI4
a
);,.
z
c)
;;.,
t
3. LEAVE A SMAll AMOUNT OF SLACK IN WIR\:S BE1WHN
REAR AND CHAS-SIS ASSE.MbUES
Nt}MeERS ON ..)102, JI04 AND TfR\;HNA.L
FOR. R.EFE.R£N(.t ONLY A.ND 00 NOi APpt,o\R ow
8.
AND :'OLDER.
LEAD OF RI23 RUNNING TO CI31b S~ALL e~
WITH NO. Ie eLAc.K VARNlSH(P TU{)14C
COVERE!)
'0. THE MARK INC; ··'ERM. ," "NO "GRO- ARE FOR RUlRll«[
- ONLY AND DO NO! APPEAR ON CHA5SIS
L _ _ _ _ _ --1
195/196
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
r---_ _ _ _ _ - _ - ----.
j - - -------------
~~.~----------------------~~I
r------ ---- ------------
I i
I !
TOP VIEW
- ----------" - ----++-H-+i
aFT SIDE VIEW RIGHT SIDE VieW
!VOTes
/. WIReS MARKeD B IRE .,. Z IJ AW.:i SOL'" COI"'P'£'fI'
GiA55 /f(SI/LATelJ WltrE:.
Z. W/lU5 /'IIIRK£O PARE: .... /!tI Ai¥o fMtrE TlIYIYt:P
l.op,-ePr WIRE
RESTRICTED 197/198
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
I
1-+- -.:..--
I
I I
III
TOP VIEW
II
NOre,
11'II",~j
~-=-======-=-===
MARKeD II AI?! "'Z8 Awe; SOLll:> COI"'M!'R' lilA:;:' RIG)'!T 510£ VI£W
(r/5VlATCO wllrt:
2. WIf£S IrlAlb(ED 0 ARI! ... eo A rrG lIAtre TfIfNc/)
corrCff WIRE
RESTRICTED 199/'1.00
L_
i· _ ...
it
I
i
II
I II
iI
r1 ,,~i
1'--- --l
i
Ii
I
I
I I
I!
i
I
i
I,/r-<QZD-oj
C----1
- ____ I
Figure 71-
'A' ARE: NO. lIS AWG flAR'r
WIRE:.
o I
I
~ _ _ _ ._..I..--'====-v= ~=~._IL..-_~
.........
LEFT 510£ VIEW "cI<ONT VIEW ?/GhlT 5/£)£ I/lftV !34CK VIEW
201/202
RESTRICTED
AN 08-1 95
TUBING
BIOI
CI9l
cO
w
x: 3:
.... u 0
r « ...I
...J
..J u.J
3: cO )-
w
!:::
:r:
3:
NOTE.S:
I, LEADS DESIGNATE.D "B' ARE NO, ZO AWG INSULATED
SOLID WIRE.
2, A CONTINUATION OF ONE
LOWER TERMINAL,
LEADS FURNISHED AS PART OF APP-
72-Seiector
RESTRICTED 203
t-J " __ '" 50LlD WIRE,
o.,f:.. 3.
~
FURI'I/5;.,/£O i'V/TH' .4PPARATU5
5- WIPCS.
8e:
G.
~""\.
'-l
,,\ '1)
1~J; II/~~~'.) ~
."
ca' ~ ~
e:
..,
~
~ ,~lT-,,>O,
:: I
. /(El'
(])
9
"-J >;;:0
;;:0 w Zm
m
Vl
~
I
Vl
8 -.4
-1
I Lfl"::
I
OVl
eo~
..... n~
(])
;;:0
n (j) 52.51 \
/"'..'.
\ I "\/'!
"
I
()
o~
~ 1m
~ ,'<.
m B
C ~ 5'
4 ~C
VI
012':4" T
~ ,iQ
10 (:fcc. .yoTE: Cp)
,GO ~
E ,,<
R250
CJ 2_ I~
Q' 3
..,
CO
SL e
!J
N
Q ~
:3 3 z
o
I (iR':4' t/G BRB
LA'
_~HA'"
8£14"
.~~~ ORB
n
,......---::;;====--------
RESTRICTED
VVM YE.D
TUf5iNG TO [xTalO
WITHIN 16 IN OF TEk,W!N4;" 4ND £fGf:.iIN5T
END OFJ:2330
RESTRICTED 205/206
NOTES: -------
GND.
CD
r
:A
I>.J
o
,~
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
GROUNDED
TO C)fA5515
L---------+-4-------------------.
NOTES:
I. ALL V'JIRE.5 MARKED A ARt. 20 AWG BARE TlliNED cor PER WI!?£:.
ALL WIRES r<lARK[D BARE IN5ULATED STRANDED COPPER WIRE.
:? ALL WIRES MARKED C ARE FURNl514ED WITI-l APPARATU~.
W(TH APPARATUS
208 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-1
77 -Control Unit
RESTRICTED 209
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
AN 08-1 95
BlK
RD
BlK
(,
/2 /
-' J-603
BlK
79-Test Unit
RESTRICTED
----------------o~-------------------:l NtlTE5-
~~~WN~.--__-----------O~O-----+---------~WN-.
8L 0 8L
il!
CtJt.o/?.5 Sp';:CI;/I!'P /NO/CAT.!:
THIS TRACE);!
T..f?4C~R..s.
L---+---r-+-+-+---------<..../ ~>------------' . ~I
L--------------O~--------------------~ I&K~
,...--------o-J (J
8LK
)
)
Figure 80-Tesl Unil TS-58 GRM.I-Wiring Diagram
RESTRICTED 213/214
E-102
28 VOLTS APPEARS ON
TERM INAL CORRESPONDING
TO THE CHANNEL SELECTED
OTHER THREE
INDICATE "OPEN CIR:'
E-IOI
7V
r-J>~-- 0 PEN
2V
120V
180 V
30 V
33 V
J-102
155 V
(VIEWED FROM WIRING SIDE) X-103
,,30 V 28V~2V
OV
N.C
GND. -fcD<::~
220V~PMK~
I Sr'~G,
ci\-
i
OPEN
2V
~\
(/( 0 C \\\
14 V 14V~135V --- -III C II J
J-103
~
NOTES· MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE WITH THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE ADJUSTED 5. WHEN OPERATED ON AN UNTUNED CHANNEL THE VOLTAGES AT
TO 28 VOLTS. THE TERMINALS OF X-I08,X-109 AND X-liD WILL BE'
2. VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS MADE WITH A WESTON MODEL 564 TYPE C TUBE SOCKET SOCKET TERMINALS
OR EQUIVALENT 1000 OHM-PER-VOLT METER.
MEASUREMENTS IDENTIFIED THUS'" ARE TAKEN ON THE 300 VOLT X-108 GND 14 70 5* 70 28 210
SCALE. X-109 GND 14 GND. GND 65 140
4. ABOVE MEASUREMENTS HOLD ONLY WHEN THE RECEIVER IS PROPERLY X-liD GND. GND GND 65 GND 140
TUNED ON A CRYSTAL CONTROLLED CHANNEL WITH NO INCOMING 6. EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, !I.t. L MEASUREMENTS
SIGNAL AND OPERATED ON "MVC: ARE TO CHASSIS GROUND.
J-303 J-304
J-308
14 J-307
(VIEWED FROM WIRING SIDE) 20V GND
330 V
X-302 X-301
I~~\
27V . ..----.l,,----120V ...---~-13V
13.5 V
° \\ \
( (( _0 U_
(\\ 0 0 ) 1
~,,------__+- 18 V
'-------,;1--- 0 V ~ J-309
THE VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE WITH A WESTON MODEL 564 TYPE 3C VOLT - OHMMETER OR AN
EQUIVALENT 1000 OHM- PER -VOLT VOLTMETER.
2. THE PLATE VOLTAGE, MEASURED AT THE PLATE CAP OR PLATE PRONG SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY
550 VOLTS.
3. THE INPUT VOLTA<i1:: ':lHOULD BE ADJUSTED FOR 28 VOLTS AS MEASURED AT THE BATTERY.
RESTRICTED 217/211":1
RESTRICTED
08-10-195
E-102
I 2 :::)
I~NOTE7
(
l~ ~570'000
I
I
!
1,--, ....
I: :
I: !
I
/
p~; "
( I
1:--: GND.
6.0"
DYNAMOTOR
( -t: DY-2/ARR-2
~O~
I ' - - - - - - - 5 7 0 , 0 0 0 ..
\~
I X-lOS --570,000"
E-IOI
IGND~~\ 6:~~~0'"
I
10_5
54,000 ,,_ _ _-cX_-_
w
54,000" 64 * 1.0.1* :3 Kif ~Gt 6 \ tv *
250,000"
250,000"
'~r IS~12,000'"
4'
GND X-IOI
GND. 1,600,000'"
560,000'"
610,000"'---~~
I X-1I0 570,000 w 260,000'"
~GND
GND. i
<i) ~ '\ "
~ G, K. ~ 69,000
rr~~2urr-
OJ 1,600"
300,000 " GND. GND
1,000,000
~~~12,000W
6.4" "
L-120 ,2,600,000'"
(NOTE 5) P 4,100'"
L G~~
f------f 270,000~--\--...~
1,200,000w--~:::-,
'-./''--.L._. _ _
---"<=:::""---
4,900 '"
4,100'"
J-102
X-107
(OUTSIDE VIEW)
1.500"--.,........._ 260,000~
GND. 1,500,000'" /'f-'---=~"--<-"r--- NOTE 3
T-IOI
N.C. ~--'<;-'c-'r- OPEN
(NOTE 6) GND. 1,600'" 260,000'"
40,000" NOTE 3
NOTE 3
300'"
SOCKETS VIEWED FROM WIRING SIDE OF CHASSIS ' - - - - - - NOTE 3
J-103
(VIEWED FROM OUTSIDE)
NOTES:
MEASUREMENTS IDENTIFIED THU~" ARE APPROXIMATE AND ARE THE VALUES OBTAINED WHEN 5. RESISTANCE FROM TERMINALS I TO 2 OF I -120 IS 300 OHMS.
THE OHMMETER LEAD IS FIRST APPLIED TO THE TERMINAL. 6. RESISTANCE FROM TERMINALS I TO 2 OF T-IOI IS 1,200.
2. TERMINAL 2 OF RECEPTACLE J-102 INDICATES 300 OHMS WHEN THE 'HI' CONNECTION ON 7. THE TERMINAL OF E-102 CORRESPONDING TO THE CHANNEL WHICH IS LATCHED WILL
T-101 (FOR apOO OHM PHONES) IS USED. AND 100 OHMS WHEN THE 'LO' CONNECTION (FOR INDICATE 5.5" OHMS. THE OTHER THREE WILL INDICATE 300 OHMS
600 OHM PHONES) IS USED. s. RESISTANCE FROM CENTER CONDUCTOR OF J -IOi TO CHASSIS IS 0 OHMS ON DeTESTS.
3. THE TERMINAL OF J-103 CORRESPONDING TO THE CHANNEL WHICH IS LATCHED WILL 9. MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE WITH RECEiVER REMOVED FROM THE RACK AND WITH
INDICATE 'OPEN CIRCUIT." THE OTHER THREE TERMINALS WILL INDICATE 24* OHMS. THE DYNAMOTOR AND ALL TUBES IN THEIR CORRECT SOCKETS.
4. RESISTANCE FROM POSITIVE BRL'SH OF B-IOI TO CHASSIS IS 6 OHMS.
10. EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE TO CHASSIS GROUND.
J-307
i----tb
I
: ~ ;1
300~
I i FROM FRONT) : dJ :!II
I H K I I H K I j
I
0
_ !!
115~----r0 GND.~
J-308 0"l500~
71 I~ 0T
VIEWED FROM WIRING SIDE
10PEN CIR.
I
.1
OPEN~
IV
!
G:Yf J2.5QOW OPEN-M
!
~
0.J I 33,oOOw ,ooL-p
OPEN i I I
6
""".'V""'+H--1 ;E: CIR. I
190'"
~~-;--\...-CIR. \
GND.
51w _-'<-"""",,,""",
-----"-'--1.-;.oo~ I
\! i'~-+H- ~:~ ~ _I
OPEN
uNO. CIR. II'
~~
OPEl'll
CIR.
I
24000" 500'
(NOTE 2) I @.6 ~ OPEt:J CIR.
24'OOO,",~ \2:)H \
'"' G, ~H! OPEN CIR. i
12,500 \ a 2 GND.
G. ~_~~ 200~
SOCKETS VIEWED FROM
~/ (NOTEZl J-309
I K-306
WIRING SIDE OF CHASSIS (VIEWED FROM FRQNT)
I
NOTES
I. RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE WITH THE TRANS- 4. WINDINGS OF RELAYS K-302, K-303, K-305 AND K -306 ARE
MITTER REMOVED FROM THE RACK, TUBES REMOVED FROM CONNECTED IN PARALLEL. THE RES)STANCE OF THE
THEIR SOCKETS AND CABLES TO J-307 AND J-309 DISCONNECTED. IN PARALLEL IS 47 OHMS.
2. NO TUBE ELEMENT CONNECTED TO THIS PIN. TERMINAL THE RESISTANCE OF THE RE.LAY TAKEN SINGLY IS
USED AS A CONNECTING TERMINAL FOR EXTERNAL CIRCUITS. K-301 300'" K-304 250'"'
3. THIS CIRCUIT WILL INDICATE 'OPEN CIRCUIT" IF TURRETS ARE K-302 300 W K-305 300'"
IN PROPER POSITION FOR OPERATION ON CORRESPONDING CHANNEL. K- 303 300'""' K-306 90t..}
RESTRICTED 221/'122
RESTRICTED
AN 08~10-19S
81
39
80
38
84
Antenna ............... .
Antenna A-85-A ........................ . 53 Harmonic Generator,
Antenna 58 Receiver ............................. .
Antenna ...... .. 58 Harmonic First
Automatic Volume Control Circuit. ....... . 40 Transmitter. . . . . .. ........... . ..... . 48
Automatic Volume Control 22 Harmonic Generator r Second
Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......... . 44
Harmonic Second
B Transmitter .......................... . 49
Band 79
Bench Tests ..... 74
I
Indicator 1-106-A ....................... . 53
Instruction 55
C Ins'pe<:::tlcm ............................. . 65
Coaxial .......................... . 3 Installation. . . . . . . .. . ................. . 13
Channel Selection. .. . .................. . 2 22
Channel Selector 0-101 . . . .. . .. . 27
Channel Selector 0-102 .................. . 29
V.H.F ........................ ,
Control Unit 8 Location of Transmitters and Receivers ... . 14
Control lJnit 9 VHF Transmi tter ........... . 66
Control Unit 12 VHF Receiver. . . . . .. . ..... . 66
C:ords ................................. . 58
Check ......................... " 18
M
I-F ..................... . , 78
D R-F ..................... . 81
Detector ....... . 39 AVC ................... . 84
59 A-F .. ", ............. ,. 80
Mixer .......................... . 39
Modulator .................. , .......... . 59
1\1 ain tenance of ................. .
RESTRICTED 223
RESTRICTED
AN 08-10-195
from Channel to
Channel ....
from
Channel .... 2
from -M Channel
22 Channel ........................... .
24
Oscillator 48
Power lVleter. , ................ , , . 63
Test 53
Test 55
P Test t.,qUlfH11<=11 53
Power 49 Test Points and Test lVleter .............. . 77
Pov,;er 80 Test Unit I-I04-A ....................... . 59
Periodic 65 Test Unit I-lS5-A ....................... . 55
Check .... , ................. . 63 Test Unit ................ . 61
Pri mary IJ ower ......................... . 3 ~rool I{it ................... " ......... . 55
Push on 14 l~ools .................................. . 61
R
Radiation Check ........................ . 19 v
IZange .............. " ................ , 22 Vacuum Tube Checker .................. . 63
Recei vcr easu remen t, Over-All ......... , . 84 VHF H.eceiver
Receiver Noise Level Check. , . , .......... . 84 Bench Tests .. , .... , , ....... , ......... . 74
Rem.ote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... . 3 Electrical Characteristics .............. . 38
Removal and Cleaning of Units .......... ,. 65 General IVlechanical ....... . 27
Replacement of Selector 0-101.. . ....... . 68 Operation ............................ . 21
Replacement of Tuning Inductors ......... . 71 l{esistance Measuremer Ls. . . . . .. . ..... . 77
Replacement of VHI; Transmitter Turrets .. 71 Tuning Con troIs ...................... . 16
Tube Complement .................... . 12
Tuning Procedure ..................... . 15
Vol tageM easuremen ts ................ . 76
S VHF Transmitter
13 Bench Test .......................... . 75
I-F AmplifIer ................ . 79 Electrical Characteristics .............. . 48
Shunting Unit. ......................... . 59 General Mechanical ....... . 45
Signal Generator Calibration ............. . 78 Operation· ..... " ..................... , 21
Genera tor, R- F ................... . (d Resistance M casuremell t s .............. . 77
Signal I-F ................... . 63 Tube .................... . 12
Squelch Adjustment. .................... . 19 Procedure ..................... . 17
Amplifier .. " ................... . 42 Measurements ................ . 77
Squelch Circuit Adjustment ........ . 80 Visual Inspection ....................... . 65
Rectifier ........................ . 42 Volt-Ohmmeter ......................... . 63
224 RESTRICTED